Sie sind auf Seite 1von 461

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

STUDENT GUIDE

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All rights reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 1

Empty page
Switch to notes view!

2
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 2

Terms of Use and Legal Notices


1. Safety Warning Switch to notes

Both lethal and dangerous voltages may be present within the products used herein. The user is strongly advised not to wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the equipment alone. The equipment used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.

view!

2. Trade Marks
Alcatel-Lucent and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks, service marks and logos (Marks) are the property of their respective holders, including Alcatel-Lucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel-Lucent or such third party owning the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented herein, which may be subject to change without notice.

3. Copyright
This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training purposes only. No other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel-Lucents written permission, and must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from Alcatel-Lucent. Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable legislation is hereby expressly prohibited. User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express written consent of AlcatelLucent.
GSM B11 All rights reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

4. Disclaimer
In no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not Alcatel-Lucent has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement, nor a recommendation. This course is intended to train the student about the overall look, feel, and use of Alcatel-Lucent products. The information contained herein is representational only. In the interest of file size, simplicity, and compatibility and, in some cases, due to contractual limitations, certain compromises have been made and therefore some features are not entirely accurate. Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-Lucent equipment and its operation, or contact your nearest Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information. The Alcatel-Lucent products described or used herein are presented for demonstration and training purposes only. Alcatel-Lucent disclaims any warranties in connection with the products as used and described in the courses or the related documentation, whether express, implied, or statutory. Alcatel-Lucent specifically disclaims all implied warranties, including warranties of merchantability, non-infringement and fitness for a particular purpose, or arising from a course of dealing, usage or trade practice. Alcatel-Lucent is not responsible for any failures caused by: server errors, misdirected or redirected transmissions, failed internet connections, interruptions, any computer virus or any other technical defect, whether human or technical in nature

5. Governing Law
The products, documentation and information contained herein, as well as these Terms of Use and Legal Notices are governed by the laws of France, excluding its conflict of law rules. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices, or the application thereof to any person or circumstances, is held invalid for any reason, unenforceable including, but not limited to, the warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, then such provision shall be deemed superseded by a valid, enforceable provision that matches, as closely as possible, the original provision, and the other provisions of these Terms of Use and Legal Notices shall remain in full force and effect.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 3

Blank Page
Switch to notes view!

4
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 4

Course Outline
1.About B11 Radio Tuning ThisFine Course 4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here Course outline 1. Typical Radio Problems 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA
Technical support 2. Idle Mode (Re)Selection 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA 5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here Course objectives

3. Radio Measurements Principles 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA

6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 4. Radio Link and Power Control 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA 1. Topic/Section is Sup Positioned Here Xxx 5. Handover Algorithms 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Xxx 7. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 6. Resources Allocation Management 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Xxx 7. Optimization Methodology 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA 8. Case Studies 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA 2. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 9. Annexes 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA 3. Topic/Section is Positioned Here 10. Solutions 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA

5
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 5

Course Outline [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

6
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 6

Course Objectives
Switch to notes view!

Welcome to BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:


By the end of the course, participants will be able, for conventional networks, to: - Characterize the usual radio problems and decide on the appropriate maintenance team; - List and describe BSS radio algorithms and related parameters;List radio parameters and check

conformity with Alcatel-Lucent standards;


- Estimate the qualitative impact of an algorithm parameter change; - Propose algorithm parameter setup to solve typical radio problems. Note: Hierarchical, dual-band, frequency hopping and GPRS networks are covered in other trainings.

7
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 7

Course Objectives [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

8
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 8

About this Student Guide


Conventions used view! in this guide Switch to notes
Note
Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed. Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful or interesting.

Technical Reference
(1) 24.348.98 Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.

Warning
Alerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment damage or personal injury.

9
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Where you can get further information


If you want further information you can refer to the following: Technical Practices for the specific product Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 9

About this Student Guide [cont.]

Switch to notes view!

10
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 10

Self-assessment of Objectives
Contract number :
At the end of each Course title : Please, return this Client (Company, Center) :

section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Dates from : Location : to :

Language Switch :

to notes view!

Number of trainees : Surname, First name :

Did you meet the following objectives ? Tick the corresponding box Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Yes (or globally yes) No (or globally no)

Instructional objectives 1 To be able to XXX

Comments

2
11
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 11

Self-assessment of Objectives [cont.]


Switch to notes view!
Instructional objectives Yes (or Globally yes) No (or globally no) Comments

12
GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Other comments

Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction - Page 12

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 1 Typical Radio Problems
3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 1

Blank Page

112
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Characterize typical radio problems in order to trigger an intervention of the appropriate team

113
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

114
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Presentation 2 Coverage Problem 3 Interference Problem 4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem 5 TCH Congestion Problem 6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention Page 7 9 18 32 38 43

115
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

116
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 6

1 Presentation

117
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 7

1 Presentation

Justification

Several sources of information can alert RFTM team:


QoS indicators Customers complaints Drive tests Other teams information (NSS statistics)

As many symptoms are common to several causes, it can be necessary to:


Consolidate standard sources of information Carry out specific examinations Deduce the appropriate team for intervention

118
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 8

2 Coverage Problem

119
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 9

2 Coverage Problem

Definition and Symptoms

Definition: Bad coverage


A network or cell facing coverage problems presents a bad RxLev and RxQual at the same time on some areas.

Symptoms:
Customers complain about dropped calls or/and no network OMC QoS indicators
TCH failure rate Call drop rate Low proportion of better cell HO High rate of DL quality HO

A interface indicators
High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interface failure

1 1 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

No information is available on non-covered parts of the network, as there are non-mobiles making calls over there! Nevertheless, cells in border of non-covered zones do have a particular behavior:

B A

Cell A will mainly perform Better Cell handovers towards its neighbors, whereas cell B, bordering the noncoverage area, will perform emergency handovers for MSs exiting the network. For these MSs, mainly DL Quality HO will be triggered:

DL because MS antenna is less efficient than BTS one, Quality rather than Level since Qual has a greater priority in Alcatel-Lucent HO causes.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 10

2 Coverage Problem

Examination

Depending on the information sources you have:


Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS)
(RxLevel , RxQuality) matrix Radio Link Counter S vector Number of calls with DL/UL bad coverage (bad RxLev, bad RxQual)

Abis interface (for example with COMPASS)


bad quality > 5% bad level RxLev < - 95 dBm and RxQual > 4

OMC-R or A interface
unexpected high traffic, induced by call repetition

Billing information
High recall rate detected

1 1 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

RMS:

Provides statistics from any area in the network which are available at any time. Cost-effective. Easier and cheaper to perform than Drive test or Abis Trace. The operator can tune 54 parameters (based on RxLev, BFI, C/I, Radio Link Counter S, Path Balance, etc.) to define up to 16 templates (depending on cell type rural, urban, etc. for example). Trigger from the OMC-R. NPO can save up to 15 days of RMS for the complete network. Templates can be designed in NPO. Default result reports are available in NPO.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 11

2 Coverage Problem

Typical Causes

If the actual coverage is not the one predicted by RNP tools:


check antenna system increase or decrease antenna down-tilt check BS_TXPWR_MAX
to be increased if value different from RNP power budget

If the actual coverage is OK compared to the predicted ones:


indoor traffic, to be handled by specific means if black spot close to cell border, ease outgoing HO

1 1 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 12

2 Coverage Problem

Investigation with Abis Trace

Example of an Abis trace analysis


RxLev_UL -89.29 -89.77 -83.15 RxLev_DL -84.67 -89.09 -79.15 RxQual_UL RxQual_DL 0.42 0.41 0.17 0.43 0.38 0.33 Path_loss_UL 123.82 124.87 116.05 Path_loss_DL 123.67 128.09 121.22 delta_Path_loss 0.15 -3.21 -5.16 Delta_quality -0.01 0.03 -0.16 AV_MS_PWR 34.53 35.11 32.9 Nb_of_samples 3074 10 253 5339

TRX index 1 2 3

DISTRIBUTION OF UPLINK QUALITY TRX index 1 2 3 Qual0 86.50% 88.11% 77.70% Qual1 3.19% 1.82% 4.30% Qual2 2.50% 1.91% 4.30% Qual3 2.57% 2.51% 4.36% Qual4 1.92% 2.14% 3.56% Qual5 2.08% 2.17% 3.56% Qual6 0.98% 1.15% 1.70% Qual7 0.26% 0.19% 0.17% Bad_Quality 3.32% 3.51% 5.43%

DISTRIBUTION OF DOWNLINK QUALITY TRX index 1 2 3 Qual0 88.29% 87.50% 71.30% Qual1 1.82% 2.98% 3.82% Qual2 2.05% 2.60% 4.02% Qual3 2.37% 2.43% 4.89% Qual4 1.30% 2.11% 4.16% Qual5 1.46% 1.14% 4.30% Qual6 1.76% 0.74% 4.23% Qual7 0.94% 0.50% 3.16% Bad_Quality 4.16% 2.38% 11.73%

1 1 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

It could have been coverage problems if this trace was made for 3 mono-TRX cells. In this case, the 3 lines are uncorrelated. Anyway, delta path loss of frequency 111 is greater than 5dB, showing a problem on this TRX. If this is a 3-TRX cell, it cannot be a coverage problem as the three TRXs are not impacted. It will be either interference or malfunction of one TRE. If the trace is done on 3 mono-TRX cells, in that case, it could be a coverage problem. Be careful when interpreting this result table: even if average levels in the UL and the DL are high and a lot of Quality problems are seen, nobody can say that samples with bad quality have a good level! The level seen is just an average One should have a look at the next slide

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 13

2 Coverage Problem

Investigation with Abis Trace [cont.]

Example of an Abis trace analysis


5 7 11 1 12 3.74% Neigh_Cell_N b 0 10 5 7 6 -88.00 3 3 -95.33 3 3 -71.00 1 6 -80.00 1 3 -80.00 1 <RxLev_Serving>= -102.17 dBm BSIC <Lev> Samples -100.53 2 57 2 -98.71 45 6 -98.03 34 3 -98.61 33

Thresholds Bad Coverage RxLev -95 RxQual > 4 Interference RxLev > -95 RxQual > 4

BC_DL: 115

Frequency: 92 Number_UL: 10 253 Number_DL: 10 253 Int_UL: 2


BC_UL: 358

0.02% 3.49% 2.38%


Neigh_Cell_Nb

Int_DL: 0%
BC_DL: 244

0 1 Frequency: 111 Number_UL: 5339 Number_DL: 5339 Int_UL: 0


BC_UL: 290

<RxLev_Serving>= -106.17 dBm BSIC <Lev> Samples 2 67 104.64 5 48 107.50

0.00% 5.43%
11.73%

Int_DL: 0%
BC_DL: 626

Neigh_Cell_N b 10

<RxLev_Serving>= -106.56 dBm BSIC <Lev> Samples -101.54 63 2

1 1 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All samples are Bad Coverage samples (BC). None is interference, showing that this cell is not facing any interference problem. By the way, if the cell is:

mono-TRX, this is a coverage problem. 3 TRXs, this is a malfunction of the TRE (shown also by the high value of delta_path_loss).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 14

2 Coverage Problem

Investigation with RMS

Suspecting a cell coverage problem


Distribution of samples per RxQual value and RxLev band
Downlink Samples Matrix in log scale
RxQuality (Nb) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ RxLevel (dB)
X

Interval of number of samples


[0, 14 793] ]14 793, 23 446] ]23 446, 29 586] ]29 586, 34 348] ]34 348, 38 239] ]38 239, 41 529] ]41 529, 44 378] ]44 378, 46 892] Out of Range

Not acceptable coverage limit: too low level too bad quality

Distribution of samples per RxLev band

1 1 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

A coverage problem is observed when a significant amount of the traffic of a cell is suffering from both low level and bad quality (RxQual). To confirm, distribution of samples per RXLEV band should be also considered to know the proportion of calls which are experiencing a low signal level. If a lot of samples of low level and bad quality are observed for only a sub-part of the TRXs (can be one only) then a BTS hardware problem or a problem on the antenna should be suspected. If all the TRXs are experiencing a lot of samples of low level and bad quality then a coverage problem must be suspected. These RMS indicators are provided on the NPO tool per TRX, per Cell:

Matrix of Number of Measurement Results per DL RxQual value and per DL RxLev band RMQLDSAM = RMS_DL_RxQuality_RxLevel_sample

Vector of Percentage of Samples per DL RxLev band RMQLDLVDV = RMS_DL_RxLevel_distrib

Vector of Percentage of Samples per DL RxQual band RMQLDQUDV = RMS_DL_RxQuality_distrib

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 15

2 Coverage Problem

Investigation with RMS [cont.]

Suspecting a cell coverage problem


Average TA values per RxQual value and RxLev band
Uplink average TA Distribution Down
RxQuality (Nb) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ RxLevel (dB)
X

Interval of average Timing Advance


[0, 2] ]2, 4] ]4, 6] ]6, 8] Out of Range

Maximum Timing Advance and TA > threshold


N > TA thres TA max TA threshold %N > TA thres 16.00% 14.00% 12.00% 10.00% 8.00% 6.00% 4.00% 2.00% 0.00% 01/12/2001 01/01/2002 02/01/2002 03/01/2002 04/01/2002 05/01/2002 06/01/2002 07/01/2002 08/01/2002 09/01/2002 10/01/2002 11/01/2002 12/01/2002 13/01/2002 TA max 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 14/01/2002

Not acceptable coverage limit: too low level and too bad quality

Acceptable coverage limit: sufficient level and good quality % of TA value over TA threshold has also to be considered

1 1 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In order to know if the coverage problem is due to a big amount of traffic at the cell border or rather to indoor calls, the average TA value per RXQUAL value and RXLEV band as well as the Percentage of TA values over TA threshold should be observed:

Matrix of Average TA per UL RxQual value and per UL RxLev band RMQLUTAM = RMS_UL_RxQuality_RxLevel_TimingAdvance

Rate of Measurements Results whose TA is greater than the TA threshold RMTAGTR = RMS_TimingAdvance_greater_threshold_rate

Maximum TA value of all values reported in Measurement Results RMTAMXN = RMS_TimingAdvance_max

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 16

2 Coverage Problem

Investigation with RMS [cont.]

Suspecting a local cell coverage problem


RxQual and RxLev per TA bands
5 2.5

Bad quality and bad Level for a specific TA band

4 3 2 1 0 [0,5[ [6,11[ [12,18 [ [19,24 [ [25,30[ [31,36[ [37,42[ [43,48[ [49,54[ [55,63[

-47 - 60 - 70 - 80 - 90 - 110 [0,5[ [6,11[ [12,18 [ [19,24 [ [25,30[ [31,36[ [37,42[ [43,48[ [49,54[ [55,63[

- 59

Coverage problem

1 1 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In order to know if the coverage problem is due to a big amount of traffic at the cell border or rather to indoor calls, the average TA value per RXQUAL value and RXLEV band as well as the Percentage of TA values over TA threshold should be observed:

Matrix of Average TA per UL RxQual value and per UL RxLev band RMQLUTAM = RMS_UL_RxQuality_RxLevel_TimingAdvance

Rate of Measurements Results whose TA is greater than the TA threshold RMTAGTR = RMS_TimingAdvance_greater_threshold_rate

Maximum TA value of all values reported in Measurement Results RMTAMXN = RMS_TimingAdvance_max

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 17

3 Interference Problem

1 1 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 18

3 Interference Problem

Definition and Symptoms

Definition: Interference
A network facing interference problems presents good RxLev and bad RxQual at the same time on some areas.

Symptoms
Customers complain about bad speech quality (noisy calls) and/or call drops OMC QoS indicators:
SDCCH/TCH Drop Low proportion of better cell HO High rate of DL/UL quality HO and interference HO Low HO success rate

A interface indicators
High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interface failure

1 1 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

DL/UL depends on the way on which the interference is present. Mainly, interferences are in the DL, due to bad frequency planning introducing interferences in the network. And this problem will not change till the frequency plan is not returned Sometimes, interference can be in the UL in very dense area (for example, microcell area), since MSs are very close. Finally, sometimes interferences are not coming from BS or MS but from another radio equipment, either in the UL or the DL.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 19

3 Interference Problem

Examination with RMS

Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS)


RxQual/RxLev matrix CFE/RxLev matrix C/I vectors for neighbors C/I vectors for MAFA frequencies
MAFA is a new standardized GSM feature for mobiles MAFA mobiles can provide C/I measurements from non-neighbor cells

Number of calls with DL/UL interference (good RxLev, bad RxQual) Number of noisy calls (bad RxQual) with bad voice quality (bad FER) A high rate use of the most robust AMR codecs also denounces interferences problems. But be careful, this can also be due to a pessimistic choice of the thresholds used for codec change.

1 1 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The feature Radio Measurement Statistics (RMS) is designed to make far easier the work for planning and optimization of the network by providing the operator with useful statistics on reported radio measurements. In fact these statistics give directly the real cell characteristics by taking into account the MS distribution. Thanks to this feature, the operator is able to:

detect interfered frequencies. assess the quality of the cell coverage. detect and quantify cell unexpected propagation. assess the traffic distribution in the cell from statistics on reported neighboring cells. evaluate the voice quality in the cell. etc.

In regards to the RTCH Measurements Observation (measurement type 11), the Radio Measurement Statistics feature (RMS) brings the following advantages:

smaller report files. the report files always have the same maximum length no matter what the measurement duration is. every measurement is taken into account (no sampling). no more need for measurement post-processing tools for statistics. Directly available with NPO.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 20

3 Interference Problem

Examination with RMS [cont.]

Suspecting a cell interference problem


Number of samples per RxQual value and RxLev band
Downlink Samples Matrix in log scale
RxQuality (Nb) 7 6 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ RxLevel (dB)
X

Interval of number of samples


[0, 14 793] ]14 793, 23 446] ]23 446, 29 586] ]29 586, 34 348] ]34 348, 38 239] ]38 239, 41 529] ]41 529, 44 378] ]44 378, 46 892] Out of Range

Downlink average RxQuality per RxLevel


RxQuality (Nb) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ RxLevel (dB) RxQuality Average

Average DL RxQuality = 2.81

Quality problems are obvious at any level of RMS data


Interference highlighted Network fine tuning needed

Average RxQual value per RXLev band has also to be considered


1 1 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 21

3 Interference Problem

Examination with RMS [cont.]

Suspecting a Voice Quality problem


Number of samples per BFI band and RxLev band
Consecutive Frame Erasure Matrix in log scale
CFE (Nb)
[22, 25[ [14, 18[ [18, 22[ [14, 18[

Interval of number of samples


[0, 14 793] ]14 793, 23 446] ]23 446, 29 586] ]29 586, 34 348] ]34 348, 38 239] ]38 239, 41 529] ]41 529, 44 378] ]44 378, 46 892] Out of Range

[14, 18[ [14, [10, 14[ [8, 10[ [6, 8[ [4, 6[ [2, 4[ [1, 2[ [0, 1[ [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ RxLevel (dB)
X

Consecutive Frame Erasure (BFI) is a measurement based on loss of consecutive speech frames over one SACCH mw.

Uplink average Consecutive Frame Erasure per RxLevel


CFE Average RxQuality Average Average CFE 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 [-110, -104[ [-104, -98[ [-98, -92[ [-92, -86[ [-86, -80[ [-80, -74[ [-74, -68[ [-68, -62[ [-62, -56[ [-56, -47[ 4 3 2 Average RxQual 6 5

It is directly linked to Voice Quality. RxQual to be compared with CFE since Bad RxQual does not always mean bad VQ.
1 1 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

RxLevel (dB)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

These RMS indicators are provided on the NPO tool per TRX, per Cell:

Matrix of Number of Measurements Results per CFE band (or BFI band) and per UL RxLev band RMFEM = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_RxLevel_sample Vector of Average number of Consecutive Frame Erasure per UL RxLev band RMFEBFAV = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_avg_per_RxLevel Vector of Average UL RxQual per RxLev band RMQLUQUAV = RMS_UL_RxQuality_avg_per_RxLevel

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 22

3 Interference Problem

Examination with RMS [cont.]

Suspecting a local interference problem


RxQual and RxLev per TA bands
5 2.5

Bad quality and good Level for a specific TA band

4 3 2 1 0 [0,5[ [6,11[ [12,18 [ [19,24 [ [25,30[ [31,36[ [37,42[ [43,48[ [49,54[ [55,63[

-47 - 60 - 70 - 80 - 90 - 110 [0,5[ [6,11[ [12,18 [ [19,24 [ [25,30[ [31,36[ [37,42[ [43,48[ [49,54[ [55,63[

- 59

interference problem

1 1 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

These RMS indicators are provided on the NPO tool per TRX, per Cell:

Matrix of Number of Measurements Results per CFE band (or BFI band) and per UL RxLev band RMFEM = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_RxLevel_sample Vector of Average number of Consecutive Frame Erasure per UL RxLev band RMFEBFAV = RMS_UL_ConsecutiveFrameErasure_avg_per_RxLevel Vector of Average UL RxQual per RxLev band RMQLUQUAV = RMS_UL_RxQuality_avg_per_RxLevel

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 23

3 Interference Problem

Typical Causes

GSM interference co-channel adjacent Non-GSM interference other Mobile Networks other RF sources

1 1 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 24

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: Adjacent Channels

Adjacent channel interference +6dB are sufficient to interfere (9dB according to GSM)

F(BTS1) = F(BTS2)+1 Level F(BTS1) F(BTS2)

6 dB

Frequency

1 1 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 25

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: Adjacent Channels [cont.]

Adjacent channel interference:


Symptom
Usually downlink interference High rate of quality HO, call drop (due to HO but mainly due to radio) and TCH assignment failure

Examination
Neighbor cells in Abis trace (only for BCCH) Non-neighbor cells in RMS (MAFA frequencies) Frequency planning C/(I adjacent) < -6dB

Correction
Downtilt increase of interferer, or even change of antenna orientation Reduction of BS power if necessary, Change of frequency (best solution) Concentric cell implementation (1 extra TRX needed if traffic cannot be supported by Outer+Inner configuration)

1 1 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 26

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: Co-Channel

GSM Interference
Co-Channel interference
-12dB are sufficient (-9dB according to GSM) by Outer+Inner configuration
F(BTS1) = F(BTS2) Level F(BTS2) F(BTS1)

-12 dB

Frequency

1 1 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 27

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: Co-Channel [cont.]

Co-channel interference
Symptom
Usually downlink interference High rate of quality HO, call drop and call failure

Examination
Neighbor cells in Abis trace (only for BCCH) Non-neighbor cells in RMS (MAFA frequencies) Frequency planning C/I < 12 dB

Correction
Downtilt increase of interferer, or even change of antenna orientation Reduction of BS power, Change of frequency Concentric cell implementation (1 extra TRX needed if traffic cannot be supported by Outer+Inner configuration)

1 1 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 28

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: cellular

GSM interference: cellular

BTS1: ARFCN 5 BTS2: ARFCN 6 MS1 indoor


RxLev_UL: - 90 dBm

BTS 1 (Micro)
MS 1 (indoor)

MS 2 (outdoor)

BTS 2

MS2 outdoor, connected to BTS2


1: no level on BTS1 (BTS 1 under-roof) 2: - 80 dBm on BTS1: interferer UL/DL 3: no level on BTS1 cell algo prevents BTS2->BTS1 HO

3
1 1 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

When interferences are created by frequency planning, its not so hard to detect them. But frequency planning tools mainly consider DL C/I and coverage. Some problems are more difficult to predict. For example, lets consider a microcell layer:

B A

A and B are 2 microcells with the coverage described before in dense urban environment.

Even if both cells A & B are using adjacent frequencies (5 and 6), the overlapping area is far from cell A antenna. Thus, in this area C/I is lower than 6 dB.

A red MS is connected to cell A. When the MS starts its call, it transmits full power and a PC algorithm quickly reduces MS power as the received level is very good (microcell coverage). When MS A enters the building, it faces a loss of signal of 20 dB. Then, the MS power increases to MS_TXPWR_MAX. A second mobile B is connected to cell B and moves down in the coverage area of cell B. The MS power of B decreases quickly down to MS_TXPWR_MIN as the MS is close to the antenna. But when MS B arrives outside the building where A is sitting, A and B are close and transmitting on adjacent frequencies Then B has to increase its power to avoid dropping its call. By the way, global level of freq B is increased in all cell B creating interference in the UL. All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 29

3 Interference Problem

GSM Interference: Forced Directed Retry

GSM Interference: Forced Directed Retry


The MS should connect to cell2, but no TCH available The MS connects to cell 1 with forced directed retry The MS is emitting at high level (far from BTS1)
UL interference for BTS 3

C e ll 1 :2

BTS 1 is emitting at high level


DL interference at BTS 3
MS BTS 2
el

BTS 1

l 2 : 45
Ce

BTS 3
ll 3 : 2 3

1 1 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Another more difficult case of interference: FDR


When examining the preceding situation of planning tool: no problem of C/I. No risk of interference.

The FDR algorithm allows an MS connected on an SDDCH on a cell without any free TCH to make an SDCCH-TCH handover (cause 20) so that it takes a TCH on its neighbor. As seen from the user, this is not a handover (call establishment phase, no impact on speech quality), and this algorithm is very efficient to avoid cell congestion cases.

This algorithm is mainly based on neighbor level compared to parameter L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR (n). If the level greater than this threshold, the TCH is to be seized on neighbor.

FDR is mandatory for dual layer or dual band networks (and very easy to configure in this case), since we have capture handovers. Capture handovers send traffic to lower or preferred band cells. In case these cells are congested, calls may not be established, even if upper or non-preferred band cells are free (due to MS idle mode selection, advantaging microcell for example). With the FDR algorithm, the MS takes an SDCCH in the preferred cell, and FDR is used to take a TCH on the non-preferred cell in case of congestion. This situation highlights a good network behavior, since the MS is at the same time in the coverage area of both cells (preferred and not preferred).

umbrella capture FDR microcell

The situation described on the slide corresponds to the usage of FDR in a single layer network. This is in that case a heavy-to-tune algorithm presenting of lot of interference and bad quality call risks, since the mobile will be connected to a cell when being not in its area. Alcatel-Lucent 2010 Allservice Rights Reserved
3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 30

3 Interference Problem

Non-GSM Interference

Other mobile networks: TACS/AMPS/NMT900


Inter-modulation with GSM BS/MS receiver Spurious RACH for AMPS (AMPS Tx bands close to GSM uplink band) Examination
TASC: coverage hole with 600 m from TASC BTS

AMPS => 50% reduction of range if AMPS/GSM BTS collocated

Other RF interferers (Radar, shop anti-theft mechanisms, medical device, etc.)

1 1 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Other RF interferers:

medical devices: GSM equipment disturb them more than the opposite! anti-theft mechanisms. Microcell antenna

Example:

Qual

DL
Level

Qual

shop

UL
Level

interference

The Microcell is showing a very high call drop rate. On one frequency, very small call duration. No problem seen in the frequency plannig. No potential interferer. Abis trace:

The Spectrum analyzer connected on the antenna feeder highlights a peak on GSM freq 6 in the UL Anti-theft mechanism turned off: no more problem
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 31

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

1 1 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 32

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

Definition and Symptoms

Definition: Unbalanced power budget


A cell facing unbalanced power budget problems presents a too high pathloss difference between UL and DL (often DL>UL) Rule: try to have delta as small as possible to avoid access network possible only in 1 direction (usually BTS->MS: OK and MS->BTS: NOK)

Symptoms:
OMC QoS indicators
High rate of Uplink quality Handover causes Low incoming HO success rate (no HO Access triggered on the uplink) Degradation of TCH failures and OC call drop indicators

A interface indicators
High rate of Clear Request messages, cause radio interface failure

O&M Alarms
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio BTS Alarm (VSWR) TMA Alarm (in case of G2 BTS or Evolium BTS with high power TRE)

1 1 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

UL Quality HO is triggered:

UL since the problem is in the UL. Quality as Quality has greater priority than level.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 33

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

Examination

RMS:
Path Balance vector per TRX Number of calls with abnormal bad FER (good RxQual & bad FER)

Abis monitoring:
|delta path-loss| > 5dB Check if problem is occurring for 1 TRX or all

1 1 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Problem on 1 TRX: FU/CU or TRE problem or ANY problem or cables connected to this equipment. All TRXs: problem on antenna, feeder, jumper or common equipment (e.g., ANX, ANC).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 34

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

Abis Trace

Example of an Abis trace analysis


RxLev_DL RxQual_UL RxQual_DL Path_loss_UL Path_loss_DL delta_Path_loss Delta_quality AV_MS_PWR Nb_of_samples

Frequency RxLev_UL

106 89 118 124

-94.52 -84.29 -90.75 -88.89

-87.19 -75.17 -83.36 -85.30

0.43 0.65 0.46 0.29

0.25 0.44 0.41 0.67

127.55 115.32 123.22 120.48

130.19 118.17 126.36 128.30

-2.64 -2.85 -3.14 -7.82

0.18 0.21 0.04 -0.37

33.03 31.03 32.46 31.59

2066 2001 3193 2931

DISTRIBUTION OF UPLINK QUALITY


Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual3 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_Quality

106 89 118 124

84.75% 81.41% 83.62% 90.79%

4.07% 1.70% 4.23% 1.06%

3.68% 2.95% 4.23% 2.18%

3.19% 3.65% 3.35% 2.35%

1.36% 6.35% 1.57% 1.77%

1.50% 2.55% 1.79% 1.30%

0.92% 1.30% 0.97% 0.48%

0.53% 0.10% 0.25% 0.07%

2.95% 3.95% 3.01% 1.84%

DISTRIBUTION OF DOWNLINK QUALITY


Frequency Qual0 Qual1 Qual2 Qual3 Qual4 Qual5 Qual6 Qual7 Bad_Quality

106 89 118 124

90.27% 80.16% 86.78% 77.14%

3.44% 6.45% 2.72% 4.37%

2.08% 7.00% 3.95% 5.87%

1.55% 3.85% 1.82% 5.94%

0.92% 1.50% 1.41% 3.48%

1.36% 0.50% 1.13% 1.36%

0.34% 0.45% 1.19% 0.82%

0.05% 0.10% 1.00% 1.02%

1.74% 1.05% 3.32% 3.21%

1 1 35
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 35

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

RMS Data

Suspecting a TRX hardware problem


Average Path Balance
PathBalance Distribution

Nb Samples 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 0 [-110, -20[ [-20, -10[ [-10, -6[ [-6, -3[ [-3, 0[ [0, 3[ [3, 6[ [6, 10[ [10, 20[ [20, 110[ PathBalance (dB) Nb Samples

Average Cell Path Balance = - 0.9 dB

A fair average Path Balance at Cell level can hide a bad value for one TRX
1 1 36
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

These RMS indicators are provided on the NPO tool per TRX, per Cell:

Vector of the Number of Measurement Results per Path Balance band RMPBV = RMS_PathBalance_sample Average Path Balance value RMPBAN = RMS_PathBalance_avg

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 36

4 Unbalanced Power Budget Problem

Typical Causes

Antennas or common RF components, TMA (pb common to all TRXs of the BTS)

TRX RF cables/LNA ... if problem located on only 1 FU

1 1 37
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Every BTS has its proper architecture and the diagnosis must be adapted.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 37

5 TCH Congestion Problem

1 1 38
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 38

5 TCH Congestion Problem

Definition and Symptoms

Definition: TCH Congestion


TCH Congestion rate (TCH Assignment Phase) is too high (more than 2%) Rule: try to meet the offered traffic (asked by users) by providing the right number of resources (TRX extension)

Symptoms:
Customers complain about Network busy OMC QoS indicators
High TCH Congestion rate Low incoming Intra/Inter BSC HO success rate (no TCH available) High Directed Retry rate if activated

A interface indicator: BSS Congestion failure in OC


High rate of Assignment Failure messages, No radio resource available

1 1 39
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 39

5 TCH Congestion Problem

Examination and Typical Causes

Examination: TCH Congestion


On a per cell basis examination, check the evolution of the TCH Congestion rate.

Typical causes:
Special events:
Foreseeable: football match, important meeting

Activate some TRXs already installed (and use Synthesized FH) Add special moving BTSs

Not foreseeable: car crash on the highway

1 1 40
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Cells on wheel operational by several operators around the world for special events coverage & capacity:

IRMA (SFR) connected to Caens BSC. Orange coverage / Football WC 1998 for Paris Stade de France :

Specific cells covering Paris Stadium. During games, only small capacity (using joker frequencies). During breaks, some TRX off-cells around are turned off, and frequencies are reused for stadium cells.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 40

5 TCH Congestion Problem

Typical Causes

Daily periodic problems


At peak hour, the cell is not correctly dimensioned.

Hardware solution (refer to Annex)


Estimate the offered traffic: At OMC-R level: Traffic in Erlang/(1- TCH Congestion rate) Use the B-Erlang law to estimate the number of TCHs required for a 2% blocking rate, thus the target configuration Add TRXs to reach the new target configuration and find joker frequencies and / or implement concentric cells

1 1 41
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Warning: offered traffic is not the capacity delivered by the system but the traffic asked by the users.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 41

5 TCH Congestion Problem

Typical Causes [cont.]

Daily periodic problems


At peak hour, the cell is not correctly dimensioned.

Software solution
Use specific densification features
Half Rate Forced Directed Retry Traffic handover Fast Traffic handover Candidate Cell Evaluation (FREEFACTOR / LOADFACTOR)

1 1 42
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Half rate may not only mean SW solution. Need of G2 BSC/TC, Evolium TRE or G2 DRFU.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 42

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

1 1 43
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 43

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

Process

QOS team

Drive test team

Problem characterization Make assumption causes Investig problem ?


END DHCP

QOS alarm on the network, on a BSC or some cells - Indicators (% call drop) - Field measurements/planning - Subscriber complains No

RFT team - Interferences - Coverage (indoor) - Power budget - Congestion (TCH, SDCCH) - BSS problem

No Yes Yes No Yes

Recurrent problem ?

Planning/BSS causes

Correction action

Check the tuning of default radio parameters Planning team Maintenance team Standard parameters ?

Dimensionning team Consult the config. db On purpose No Impact estimation N times System problem ? OK Yes Standard setting ?
END DHCP

No Yes

Yes

Choose an (other) classical algo Identify the tunable parameters Impact simulation of a parameter modification

Cell corrected ? Neighbor cell ? NOK Check ? With QOS ?

No =N Call expert

No Yes

Simulation OK ?

Parameters modification Database updating

- Microcell, multiband - Concentric

- Hopping - Marketing

1 1 44
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 44

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

Coverage Problem

In case of coverage problem:


If the field reality does not match the RNP prediction
Maintenance team to change physical configuration (tilt, azimuth, antenna height, etc.) and drive test team to check it

If the field reality matches the RNP prediction


Deployment team to add sites (tri-sector, micro cellular, indoor cells)

1 1 45
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 45

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

Other Problems

In case of interference problem:


Planning team to identify the interference source and correct it (joker frequency, new frequency planning, etc.)

In case of unbalanced power budget problem:


Maintenance team to check the impacted BTS (antennas, TMA, RF cables, LNA, diversity system, etc.)

In case of TCH congestion problem:


Traffic team (theoretically always in relation with the marketing team) to manage the need of TRX extension, densification policy, etc.

1 1 46
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 46

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

Exercise

Match the symptoms listed below with the corresponding problem.


Unbalanced Power Budget High rate of UL QUAL HO causes Good RxLev and Bad RxQual VSWR alarm (OMC-R) (Voltage Standing Wave Ratio) Bad RxLev and Bad RxQual High Path-loss difference between UL and DL Low incoming HO success rate OMC QOS indicators: % TCH ASS failure high % call drop high Bad coverage Interferences TCH Congestion

Time allowed: 10 minutes


1 1 47

% QUAL HO % call drop % call failure

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 47

6 Deducing the Right Team for Intervention

Radio Fine Tuning Team

When the detected problem does not concern another team (Network design and frequency planning, Dimensioning, Radio engineering, Maintenance) or when the other teams cannot give any solution (too tight frequency planning, no additional TRX available, no financial budget for new sites, etc.), the Radio Fine Tuning team has to find a compromise between:
High traffic density (Erl/km/Hz) High quality of service (Call drop, CSSR, Speech quality, indoor, etc.)

Its role will be to take charge of radio resources management process This process can be fully described by the following algorithms:
Idle Mode Optimization
Cell Selection and Reselection

Dedicated Mode Optimization:


Radio Link Supervision and Power Control Handover

Ressources Allocation and Management

In-depth knowledge of these algorithms is required for tuning


1 1 48
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 48

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 1 49
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 49

End of Module Typical Radio Problems

1 1 50
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Typical Radio Problems GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12201AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 1 Page 50

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 2 Idle Mode (Re)Selection
3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 1

Blank Page

122
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the Cell Selection and Reselection Algorithm List the associated parameters

123
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

124
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection Page 7

125
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

126
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 6

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

127
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 7

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

Selection and Reselection Principles

At startup (IMSI Attach), the MS selects a cell with:


best C1 once camped on one cell (in idle mode)

the MS can decide to reselect on another one if:


C1 criterion is too low the MS cannot decode downlink messages the current cell is becoming forbidden (e.g. barred) the MS cannot access the cell there is a better cell, regarding C2 criterion

128
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Idle Mode Status null: the Mobile Station (MS) is off Status search BCCH: the MS searches a broadcast channel with the best signal level (cell selection and reselection) BCCH list: up to 36 BCCH frequencies plus BSIC can be saved on SIM per visited network. Look if frequencies of the BCCH list can be used. No entries in the BCCH list, or the location is completely different: scan frequency band. Status BCCH: the MS is synchronized on a BCCH. The MS camps on a cell. The BTS sends the neighbor cells list (BCCH allocation BA) on BCCH in System Information (SI) 2, 2bis and 2ter if BSS parameter EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH in dual band networks: GSM900 serving cell GSM900 neighbor cells put into SI 2 GSM1800 neighbor cells put into SI 2ter/2bis GSM1800 serving cell GSM900 neighbor cells put into SI 2ter GSM1800 neighbor cells put into SI 2/2bis The MS measures RXLEV from BCCH of the serving and neighbor cells. Camping on a cell is performed using C1 criterion only (the chosen cell is the one with the best C1) The MS needs to have access to the network. The MS needs to be accessible by the network. Reselection is done using the mechanisms referenced above. handover algorithms in idle mode

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 8

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

C1 Criteria

C1
ensures that, if a call was attempted, it would be done with a sufficient downlink and uplink received level based on 2 parameters, broadcasted on BCCH
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN [dBm] MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH [dBm]

evaluated every 5 sec (minimum) C1 = A - MAX(0,B) > 0 A = RxLev - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - P If A > 0 & B < 0 OK, if B > 0, it can be compensated by A
A >> 0 means that the MS is closer to the BTS

129
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN [dBm] = minimum level to access the cell MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH [dBm] = maximum level for MS emitting
A = RxLev - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

assess that the MS received level is sufficient

B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - P

P maximum power of MS assess that the BTS received level will be sufficient

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 9

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

C2 Criteria

CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND= not present THEN C2=C1 else


C2 = C1 + CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET - TEMPORARY_OFFSET (T) (if PENALTY_TIME 31)
if T > PENALTY_TIME, TEMPORARY_OFFSET(T) = 0 used to avoid locating on transient cell CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to favor cell among other (e.g. micro-cell vs. umbrella, once T > PENALTY_TIME)

Or C2 = C1 - CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (if PENALTY_TIME = 31) CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET used to handicap some cells among others

One reselection criterion is compared to C2s


C2neighbor > C2current if cells belong to same LA C2neighbor > C2current+Cell_Reselect_Hysteresis if cells from a different LA

1 2 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Note:

CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET: from 0 to 126 dB, step 2dB PENALTY_TIME: from 0=20s to 30=620s, step: 20s; 31=infinite TEMPORARY_OFFSET: from 1=10dB to 6=60dB; 7 = infinite

The use of a second formula (Penalty_time = 31) is restricted to very special cases, as we do not like to penalize a cell. If a cell is parametered with PT=31, it will be penalized compared to ALL its neighbors. To penalize a cell compared to one neighbor, one should better boost the neighbor cell (using the first formula). The first formula is very useful for favoring indoor cell or microcell. Cell Selection and Cell Reselection Considering CELL_BAR_QUALIFY In case of phase 2 MS and CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND=1, it is possible to set priorities to cells CELL_BAR_QUALIFY Two values:

0 = normal priority (default value) 1 = lower priority

CELL_BAR_QUALIFY Interacts with CELL_BAR_ACCESS (barring cell) A phase 2 MS selects the suitable cell with the highest C2 (C1>0) belonging to the list of normal priority. If no cell with normal priority is available then the MS would select the lower priority cell with the highest C2 (C1>0).
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 10

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

Exercise 1

On this network example


List the parameters involved in the selection / reselection process

CI=1823 GSM900

C on c e n tr i c c e l l ( 8 5 57 , 18 2 3 )

CI=6271 GSM900 CI=6270, GSM900

C e ll

Time allowed: 5 minutes

CI=6169 GSM900

S e cto r i ze d c e l l ( 8 56 4 , 616 9)

CI=1964 GSM900

C el l ( 8 5 6 4 , 19 6 4 )
1 2 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 11

1 Idle Mode Cell Selection and Reselection

Exercise 2

Find the selected cell by the MS


RxLev (cell 1) -80 -84 -88 -88 -89 RxLev (cell 2) -96 -90 -90 -87 -85 RxLev (cell 3) -104 -100 -87 -82 -78
CI=6271 GSM900 CI=6270, GSM900

Measurements 1 2 3 4 5

CI=1823 GSM900

C e ll 3 ( 8 55 7 , 1 82 3 )

C ell

CI=6169 GSM900

C e ll 2 ( 8 5 64 , 61 6 9 )

CI=1964 GSM900

C e ll 1 ( 8 56 4 , 1 96 4 )
1 2 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The same parameters setting is applied in all the cells: Rxlev_Access_min = -103 dBm for all cells Cell_Reselect_Offset = 0 dB Temporary_Offset = 0 dB Penalty_Time = 0 (20 s) Cell_Reselect_Hysteresis = 6 dB

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 12

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 2 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 13

End of Module Idle Mode (Re)Selection

1 2 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Idle Mode (Re)Selection GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12202AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 2 Page 14

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 3 Radio Measurements Principles
3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 1

Blank Page

132
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the Radio Measurements Principles List the associated parameters

133
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

134
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Radio Measurements 2 Radio Measurement Data Processing Page 7 20

135
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

136
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 6

1 Radio Measurements

137
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 7

1 Radio Measurements

Radio Measurement Mechanisms


MS connected (TCH or SDCCH) The serving cell gives the MS the list of the neighbor cells to listen to Every SACCH, the MS reports to the serving cell via a measurement report message:
Received level of 6 best cells (which can change) DL level and quality of serving cell
n
g
e

c e ll st

Be

s t c e ll

Be

s t c e ll C e ll

ce

ll
SYS_INFO_5 message (list) MS reporting

S e r vi

Be

s t c ell

es

C e ll
t c e ll

Be

s t c e ll

C e ll

138
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The BTS sends a SYS_INFO_5 message that contains the list of neighbor cells for connected mode (The SYS_INFO_2 message contains the list of neighbor cells for idle mode).

Sys info 2bis, 2ter, 5bis and 5ter are also used for multiband networks. MS reporting depends on EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH and on MULTIBAND_REPORTING parameters. The MS may report:

6 strongest cells of any band (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=0), or 5 strongest cells of the serving band + 1 strongest cell of another band (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=1), or 4+2 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=2), or 3+3 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING=3).

RXLEV

Range: [-110dBm, -47dBm] Binary range: [0, 63]; 0=-110dBm, 63=-47dBm The higher the physical or binary value, the higher the receiving level

RXQUAL

Range: [0.14%, 18.10%] Binary range: [0, 7]; 0=0.14%, 7=18.10% The lower the physical or binary value, the lower the bit error rate, the better the quality 0-2=excellent; 3=good; 4=ok; 5=bad; 6=very bad; 7=not acceptable
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 8

1 Radio Measurements

Radio Measurement Mechanisms [cont.]

For each MS connected to the BTS (TCH or SDCCH)


UL received level and quality is measured every SACCH The Timing Advance (TA) is computed The UL information is gathered into the measurement report This is the message result sent by the BTS to the BSC
Measurements Active channel preprocessing
U
sureme mea nt s DL

measurem en DL L+

ts

Measurement report MS BTS

Measurement result

BSC

PC execution Candidate HO & PC cell Candidate cell evaluation decision evaluation Candidate cell evaluation HO execution

The BSC is computing algorithms usually using average value (sliding window) of these measurements
139
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The BTS starts sending MEASUREMENT RESULT messages as soon as it receives the RL ESTABLISH INDICATION message from the MS. The BTS stops sending MEASUREMENT RESULT messages upon receipt of one of the two following messages: DEACTIVATE SACCH RF CHANNEL RELEASE Every SACCH multiframe, the BTS: receives the MEASUREMENT REPORT message from the MS. For power control and handover algorithms, this message contains downlink measurements and, in the layer 1 header, the power used by the MS. does uplink measurements. reports the uplink and downlink measurements to the BSC in the MEASUREMENT RESULT message. Input flows Uplink radio signal: radio signal received on the Air interface. BS_TXPWR_CONF: BS transmit power currently used by the BS. DTX_DL: indicator of downlink DTX use. Output flows: Abis MEASUREMENT RESULT message Internal flows: Radio measurements. Air MEASUREMENT REPORT message (DL) containing DL MS radio measurements. Uplink radio measurements (quality and level) and a flag indicating whether DTX was used in the downlink (DTX/DL). Timing advance: last TA calculated by the BTS. MS_TXPWR_CONF: last reported value of MS power (reported by the MS). BS_TXPWR_CONF: value of the BS transmit power currently in use. BFI_SACCH: bad frame indicator of the SACCH block produced every SACCH multiframe (# 480ms): 0 = SACCH frame successfully decoded 1 = SACCH frame not successfully decoded
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 9

1 Radio Measurements

Structure of a Measurement Result


MSG_DISK MSG_TYPE CHAN_NUMBER_IEID CHANNEL_NUMBER Meas_result_number_IEID Meas_result_number Element Identifier Length SACCH_BFI / DTX_DL{1} / RXLEV_UL_FULL {2} / RXLEV_UL_SUB_ {2} / RXQUAL_UL_FULL / RXQUAL_UL_SUB BS_POWER_IEID {3} / BS_POWER Element Identifier MS_TXPWR_CONF / R{3} TOA / R{2} Element Identifier Length Length TI {4} / Prot. Disc{4} 0 / Message Type{7} BA_USED / DTX_UL / RXLEV_DL_FULL 0 / MEAS_VALID / RXLEV_DL_SUB 0 / RXQUAL_DL_FULL / RXQUAL_DL_SUB / NO_NCELL_M NO_NCELL_M / RXLEV_NCELL(1) FREQ(1) / BSIC(1) BSIC(1) / RXLEV_NCELL(2) RXLEV_NCELL(2) / FREQ(2) / BSIC(2) BSIC(2) / RXLEV_NCELL(3) RXLEV_NCELL(3) / FREQ(3) / BSIC(3) BSIC(3) / RXLEV_NCELL(4) RXLEV_NCELL(4) / FREQ(4) BSIC(4) / RXLEV_NCELL(5) RXLEV_NCELL(5) / FREQ(5) FREQ(5) / BSIC(5) / RXLEV_NCELL(6) RXLEV_NCELL(6) / FREQ(6) FREQ(6) / BSIC(6)
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

L1 Info

L3 Info: Measurement report from the MS

1 3 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

Basically, the MEASUREMENT RESULT message is composed of:


L1 info: SACCH Layer 1 header containing MS_TXPWR_CONF and TOA. L3 info: MEASUREMENT REPORT from the MS. This message contains the downlink measurements and neighbor cell measurements. Uplink measurements performed by the BTS. BTS power level used.

SUB frames correspond to the use of DTX:

if the mobile is in DTX, the rxlevsub or rxqualsub is used to avoid measuring the TS where there is nothing to transmit in order not to distort measurements. else rxlevfull is used that is to say all TSs are measured.

MS TXPOWER CONF: which is the actual power emitted by the MS. TOA is timing advance. SACCH BFI: bad frame indicator; 2 values 0 or 1; 0 means that the BTS succeeded in decoding the measurement report. How the neighbor cells are coded:

BCCH1 index in BA list / BSIC1; BCCH2 index in BA list / BSIC2 why? because it does not receive LAC/CI (too long) but BCCH and replies with BCCH/BSIC
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 10

1 Radio Measurements

Extended Measurement Reporting (EMR)

Extended Measurement Reporting mechanisms


MS BTS TCH ASSIGNMENT (OC or TC) Assignment Request Physical Context Request Physical Context Confirm Channel Activation (TCH)
(EMO included)

BSC

MSC

Channel Activation Acknowledge TCH ESTABLISHMENT TCH Assignment Complete Assignment Complete Assignment Complete SACCH SACCH SACCH SACCH SACCH (EMO)
(MAFA Freq. List)

Extended Measurement Order includes the MAFA frequencies the MS is asked to measure EMO sent once to the MS on SACCH after TCH seizure Extended Measurement Results include the average signal level measured on each MAFA frequency over one SACCH mf duration EMR received once per call on SACCH

SACCH (EMR)
(MAFA Freq. RxLev)

1 3 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

When the BTS receives a CHANNEL ACTIVATION with the Extended Measurement Order (EMO) included, it must send this information on the SACCH to the corresponding mobile only once. When the BTS has to send this information, it must replace the sending of system information 5, 5bis, 5ter or 6 by this information. At the next SACCH multiframe, the BTS must resume the sending of this system information by the replaced one. The EMO must be sent after 2 complete sets of SYS_INFO5 and 6, i.e. after the 2nd SYSINFO 6 after the reception of SABM. This guarantees the MS has received a complete set. Then, the BTS normally receives from the MS an EXTENDED MEASUREMENT RESULT with the level of the frequencies to monitor. The BTS must make the correlation between these levels and the frequencies contained in the latest EMO information, after having decoded them, according to the order of the ARFCN. The EXTENDED_MEASUREMENT_RESULT is NOT forwarded to the BSC, instead a MEASUREMENT_RESULT with indication no_MS_results is sent to the BSC. In particular, the BTS must identify the level of the BCCH frequency of the serving cell (which must always be part of the frequencies to monitor) and apply it as the RXLEV_DL in the Radio Measurement Statistics. The other frequencies will be considered in the same way as the BCCH frequency of neighbor cells: they will be linked to the neighbor level and C/I statistics.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 11

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH


Call drop

B11
Signaling coverage Improved voice coverage with AMR

Optional feature
EN_REP_DL_FACCH EN_REP_SACCH

Available only for AMR calls


Whatever the type of AMR
FR or HR NarrowBand or WideBand Improved coverage with Repeated FACCH/SACCH

Gains
Repeated SACCH: Extended Coverage & reduction of call drops Repeated DL FACCH: Improves handover reliability of AMR calls

MS 3GPP release
Repeated SACCH is only supported by Rel 6 MS Repeated DL FACCH is mandatory for Rel 6 MS, but can be applied to legacy MS

1 3 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

When AMR speech codecs were introduced, the same ACCH (Associated Control Channels) as those used for traditional TCH/FR and TCH/EFR were re-used The consequence is that, in poor radio conditions, the more protected AMR speech codecs have now better performance (in terms of error rate) than the associated control channels. This results in an imbalance between voice and signaling. The SACCH is used mainly for the transmission of the radio measurement data. SACCH is also used for SMS transfer during a call. The BTS sends cell specific information (periodically SYS_INFO 5, 5bis, 5ter, 6) to the MS using SACCH. A FR TCH uses one TS per TDMA frame, for each frame of the multiframe, except the frames 12 and 25. The TDMA frame 12 is used to carry the SACCH and the TDMA frame 25 is an idle frame. The SACCH multiframe / block is composed of four SACCH frames/bursts; thus the SACCH period is equal to 480ms. The FACCH is associated with a TCH, and is required to support the high-speed signaling needed during call establishment, and HO management. The occurrence of the FACCH is not fixed in the multiframe, as it is for the SACCH Rather, the FACCH occurs on a TDMA frame that is reserved for a TCH. The multiplexing of TCH and FACCH is possible by means of the frame stealing. This means that a speech frame carried over a TCH can be replaced by a FACCH frame. Additional flag: REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT 0: repeated DL FACCH enabled only for the AMR mobile stations having indicated the support of the feature by repeated ACCH Capability bit = 1 1: repeated DL FACCH enabled for all AMR mobile stations

This parameter is relevant only if repeated downlink FACCH (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) is enabled. Function available on BSC Evolution only. The value 1 is used to tackle early implementations, ie for MS with repeated ACCH Capability bit=0 or MS without Repeated ACCH Capability bit (legacy MS).
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 12

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated DL FACCH: principle


B11

Each DLFACCH frame is sent twice with exactly the same content In case of these 2 DLFACCH frames are not decoded, they are softcombined to succeed the decoding
BTS
FA
LAP

CC Hn

+4

FACCH n

FACCH n+1

FACCH n+2

FACCH n+3

Dm

CC Hn

+4 ,1 FA

FACCH n+1,2

FACCH n+1,2

FACCH n+1,1

FACCH n+2,1

FACCH n+3,1

FACCH n+3,2

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

1 3 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

In case of TCH/FR the transmission of the repeated FACCH is done by leaving one TCH frame between the two LAPDm frames.

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

TCH frame

FACCH n,1 ok

FACCH n,2 ok

CC Hn TDMA +4 ,2

FA

Multiframe

AMR call

40ms

Rel-6 MS
FAC C H n+ 3,1

FA CC H

n+

3,2

ou th e tc o m e d proecodi of ces ng s

NOK

Nok

Nok

Nok

ok

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 13

ok

Soft Combining
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated DL FACCH: dynamic activation

B11

The FACCH frame is effectively repeated if


EN_REP_DL_FACCH = 1 or 2 AND AMR codec mode request (CMR) REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_XX
XX = FR or HR or WB
Rep eat ed FAC CH N

FAC C

HN

10,2 kbit/s 7.95 kbit/s codec threshold 5,90 kbit/s 4,75 kbit/s

1 3 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

EN_REP_DL_FACCH = 1: enabled for LAPDm command frames. EN_REP_DL_FACCH = 2: enabled for LAPDm command frames, and also for LAPDm response frames (valid only for the MS having indicated the support of the feature by Repeated ACCH Capability bit=1). Dynamic activation is done as long as codec mode request CMR <= REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_XX.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 14

CMR

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated DL SACCH: principle


B11

If the MS can not decode correctly a DL SACCH, the BTS will resend it To indicate to the BTS the DL SACCH has to be repeated, the MS set the SRR bit to 1 in the UL SACCH frame
BT S
480ms SACCH n+1,1 SACCH n+1,2 SACCH n+3,1 SACCH n+3,2 SACCH n+2 SACCH n+4 SACCH n
LAP

Dm

DL

Soft Combining

Soft Combining

Soft Combining

TDMA Multiframe Rel-6 MS


ou th e tc o m e d proecodi of ces ng s

Rel-6 MS

SACCH SRR=1

SACCH SRR=1

SACCH SRR=1

1 3 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

SRR: SACCH Repetition Request

SACCH

SACCH

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 15

SACCH

UL

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated UL SACCH: principle


B11

If the BTS can not decode correctly a UL SACCH, the MS will resend it To indicate to the MS the UL SACCH has to be repeated, the BTS set the SRO bit to 1 in the DL SACCH frame SAC BT
480ms

CH f

SACCH n+1,1 SRO=1

SACCH n+2,1

1 3 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

SRO: SACCH Repetition Order

SACCH n,1 SACCH m,1

LAP

Dm

Rel-6 MS

ou th e tc o m e d pro ecod of ces ing s BT in S

SACCH m+1,1

SACCH m+1,2
SA H CC

,1 +7 m

Rel-6 MS
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 16

1 Radio Measurements

Repeated SACCH: dynamic activation

B11

RDSACCH dynamic activation:

The RDSACCH is activated if at least 3 SRR bits set to 1 have been received in the decision window Inversely RDSACCH is deactivated if less than 3 SRR bits set to 1 have been received in the decision window
Decision window size = 10 successive UL SACCH periods

SACCH Period SRR Value

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

SRR Sum

0/1

1/2

2/3

3/4

4/5

5/6

5/7

5/8

6/9

6/10

6/10

5/10

4/10

3/10

2/10

2/10

3/10

RDSACCH Activted?

YES NO

Additionally, RDSACCH is also activated when UL RLT counter (S) becomes inferior or equal to a given value RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH

Similar principle for RUSACCH dynamic activation (see comment)

See Radio Link Supervision part

1 3 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

RUSACCH is activated if at least 3 UL SACCH messages have not been correctly received before combining in a window whose size is equal to 10 successive UL SACCH periods (inversely RUSACCH is deactivated if less than 3 UL legacy SACCH messages have not been correctly received before combining in the window, note this means the BTS always try to first decode the SACCH before any combining). At call start, RUSACCH is disabled by default. At the beginning of the call, the decision window is reduced to the number of elapsed SACCH periods but the threshold remains the same. Note this means the state of RUSACCH activation is updated in every SACCH period.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 17

1 Radio Measurements

Exercise 1

(BSIC, BCCH index)/(LAC, CI) problem


As LAC and CI information take up too much space, the MS only reports the decoded BSIC and the BCCH index when it sends measurement on the adjacent cell. The BSC makes the correspondence between the couple (BSIC, BCCH index) and the real neighbor cell concerned [completely defined by (LAC,CI)]. WHAT IS THE RISK?

Time allowed: 5 minutes

1 3 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 18

1 Radio Measurements

Exercise 2

Explain why cell 2 has a very high outgoing HO unsuccessful rate and a high call drop.
CI=6169 2006 GSM900

Ce ll 3 ( 7 , 62 )

C ell

C e ll

CI=6169 GSM900

C e ll 2 ( 3, 4 6 )
CI=1964 GSM900

C e ll 1 ( 7, 6 2)
1 3 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 19

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

1 3 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 20

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Name of No Level

Assignment of radio measurements data processing functions in the ALCATEL BSS

BTS
Radio Link Measurements

BSC
Active Channel Pre-processing

1 3 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The active channel pre-processing function calculates average values of signal levels, qualities and timing advance provided by the radio link measurements function. The pre-processing is based on a sliding window averaging technique. The averaging is either weighted or unweighted depending on the type of the input parameters.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 21

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Active Channel Pre-Processing

Active channel pre-processing


ACTIVATED EACH TIME A MEASUREMENT IS RECEIVED AVERAGING VALUES OF SIGNAL LEVELS, QUALITIES, TIMING ADVANCE
USING SLIDING WINDOW TECHNIQUE

BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF neighbor CELLS


The MS is reporting the 6 best cells at one time They can change from 1 measurement to another Maximum for 1 call: last 32 best ones (among 64 maximum declared as neighbor)

1 3 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 22

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Active Channel Pre-Processing - Principles


HANDLED by the BSC ACTIVATED when the BSC receives:


ESTABLISH INDICATION from the MS on SAPI 0, or HANDOVER FAILURE from the MS, or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE from the MS (in case of intracell handover)

STOPPED when a HANDOVER COMMAND is emitted in the serving BSC AVERAGING VALUES OF SIGNAL LEVELS, QUALITIES, TIMING ADVANCE
USING SLIDING WINDOW TECHNIQUE

BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF neighbor CELLS

1 3 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The pre-processing function is stopped when a HANDOVER COMMAND is emitted by the serving BSC. At this time, the MEASUREMENT RESULT messages are ignored by the pre-processing function and no update of the bookkeeping tables or averaging is done anymore. The pre-processing function is enabled again (in case of failure of an intracell or intercell handover) after reception of either messages listed above, and the old measurements are kept in the book-keeping list and taken into account in the new averaging. The pre-processing function is completely handled by the BSC. The input parameters of this function are provided by the BTS every SACCH multiframe in the MEASUREMENT RESULT message. The function calculates average values of levels, qualities and timing advance. The pre-processing method is based on a sliding window averaging technique. The pre-processing is done for every measurement sample, i.e. every SACCH multiframe. The averaging intervals are expressed in terms of SACCH multiframe periods and their range is between 1 and 31. The averaging process for any variable can start as soon as A_YYYY_XX (YYYY stands for LEV, QUAL, PBGT or RANGE and XX for HO, DR, PC or MCHO) samples, each with MEAS_VALID bit set to 0 (validity indicator reported by the MS in the MEASUREMENT REPORT message), are actually available except in case of the averaging of the received level from the neighbor cells and the averaging of AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO, AV_BS_TXPWR_HO and AV_BS_TXPWR_DR.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 23

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Measurement Averaging

Avoid reacting too early to some atypical measurements

- 105.00 - 100.00 - 95.00 - 90.00 - 85.00 - 80.00 - 75.00

1 3 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The calculation of levels, qualities and timing advance (i.e. distance information) uses a variety of averaging window sizes as well as specific weighting factors for quality estimates. One separate window exists for:

power control on the uplink and the downlink (A_LEV_PC , A_QUAL_PC), emergency handover (A_LEV_HO , A_QUAL_HO , A_RANGE_HO), fast emergency handover for microcells (A_LEV_MCHO), better cell handover and better zone handover (A_PBGT_HO) for intra-layer, interlayer and interzone handovers, forced directed retry (A_PBGT_DR), neighbor filtering and ranking for all HOs (A_PBGT_HO), codec adaptation (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR , A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 24

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Measurement Averaging [cont.]

Objective: average measurements to avoid reacting to transient degradation


Principle: sliding window: level/quality/distance values are averaged for N last samples

N N N N

= A_LEV_HO = A_QUAL_HO = A_RANGE_HO = A_PGBT_HO

samples for uplink and downlink level samples for uplink and downlink quality samples for distance for level used in power budget equation

Example (A_LEV_HO=6, A_QUAL_HO=4, A_PBGT_HO=8)


Meas DL Level AV-RxLev AV-Lev-PGBT DL Qual AV-RxQual 2 3 3 4 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -90 -92 -93 -98 -100 -99 -98 -90 -80 -75 -72 -71 -110 -70 -69 -68 -78 -88 -95 -98 -100 -110 -110 -110 -95 -97 -96 -94 -90 -86 -81 -83 -80 -78 -77 -78 -81 -78 -83 -88 -95 -100 -104 -95 -94 -92 -89 -86 -87 -83 -80 -77 -77 -78 -81 -85 -83 -88 -93 -99 1 0 6 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 6 7 7 7 5 2 1 7 5 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 0 0 1 2 3 5 6 7

Experiences
some experiments have shown that the number of HOs is very sensitive to modification of these values
1 3 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

At BSC level, Input flows MEASUREMENT RESULT Control flows active channel pre-processing configuration parameters for PC: A_LEV_PC, W_LEV_PC, A_QUAL_PC and W_QUAL_PC, active channel pre-processing configuration parameters for HO: A_LEV_HO, W_LEV_HO, A_PBGT_HO, W_PBGT_HO, A_QUAL_HO, W_QUAL_HO, A_RANGE_HO, A_LEV_MCHO, W_LEV_MCHO, A_PBGT_DR. cells list for book-keeping: BA_IND_SACCH: indicator of the change of the BA_allocation, NBR_ADJ: number of declared adjacent cells of the serving cell denoted by n, for n=1 to NBR_ADJ: BSIC(n) and FREQ(n). Output flows Averaged measurements for power control: AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC ; AV_RXLEV_UL_PC: MS power control/threshold comparison, AV_RXQUAL_DL_PC ; AV_RXLEV_DL_PC: BS power control/threshold comparison. Averaged measurements for handover detection: AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO, AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO, AV_RXLEV_UL_MCHO, AV_RXLEV_UL_HO, AV_RXLEV_DL_HO, AV_RXLEV_DL_MCHO, AV_LOAD , averaged traffic load AV_BS_TXPWR_HO, AV_RANGE_HO, AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO, AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n), AV_RXLEV_NCELL_BIS(n). AV_RXLEV_PBGT_DR, AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n), n=1..BTSnum. BFI_SACCH AV_RXQUAL_xx_CA_HR_FR, AV_RXQUAL_xx_CA_FR_HR MS_TXPOWER_CONF / BS_POWER: last power level reported by the MS and transmit power currently used by the BS.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 25

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Neighbor Cell Measurement Book-Keeping

BUILDING A BOOK-KEEPING LIST OF neighbor CELLS


The MS reports the measurements of the NO_NCELL_M ( 6) best cells every multi-frame The adjacent cells reported by the MS can change from one measurement to another The book-keeping function keeps a table of the last 32 reported adjacent cells Clearing process of non-reported neighbors during 10s (signal level=0)

1 3 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

An MS is required to measure the BCCH power level of a number of BCCH frequencies. These measurements are used for the power budget computation in the BSC and the candidate cell evaluation in the BSC. The MS reports to the BTS, in the MEASUREMENT REPORT message, the measurements of the NO_NCELL_M (NO_NCELL_M <= 6) best cells it receives (RXLEV_NCELL, BCCH frequency index and BSIC number) for each multiframe. In case of multiband capability, the mobile reports the best cells of each supported frequency band (if available). This reporting is allowed at BSS level by the flag EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH and it is specified by the parameter MULTIBAND_REPORTING. The adjacent cells reported by an MS can change over the averaging interval. The book-keeping function keeps a table composed of the last 32 reported adjacent cells, the maximum number of which is NBR_ADJ. The total number of adjacent cells for which measurements reported by the MSs are available within the average interval is BTSnum. The BSC G1 maintains a table of up to 150 cells, from which up to 64 can be declared as adjacent cells to a given cell. The BSC G2 maintains a list of up to 1000 cells, from which up to 64 can be declared as adjacent cells to a given cell. Because the maximum number of adjacent cells may be greater than 32, the number of adjacent BCCH frequencies is limited to 32. Moreover, a mechanism for overwriting obsolete entries in the book-keeping table, when new cells are reported, is provided. When the variable BTSnum reaches its maximum value of 32 and at least one new cell has to be entered in the list, then the BSC sorts out all cells in the book-keeping list, which have been reported with signal level = 0 for the last 20 measurements (10 seconds). This is done by summing the raw measurement values over the last 20 samples. All the corresponding cell entries are cleared from the bookkeeping list, BTSnum is decreased by the number of cleared entries and some of the vacant entries are used to include the new cells. The end of the comment is on the next page...
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 26

2 Radio Measurement Data Processing

Exercise

Measurements averaging
With averaging window excel sheet:
Compute averaging on quality, distance and level Make charts with different sliding averaging windows
DL Level DL Quality Distance

Raw measurements

-80 -78 -84 -87 -80 -75 -77 -94 -79 -77 -78 -84 -89 -90 -91 2 2 3 3 2 1 4 4 3 1 2 3 3 3 4 10 11 9 11 13 12 14 15 16 17 18 17 19 20 19

Average measurements
AV_RXLEV_DL_HO A_LEV_HO=8 A_LEV_HO=4 A_LEV_HO=2
DL Level A_LEV_HO=8 A_LEV_HO=4 A_LEV_HO=2

-82 -82 -82 -81 -81 -82 -84 -85 -82 -82 -82 -80 -82 -81 -82 -82 -80 -82 -85 -89 -79 -81 -86 -84 -78 -76 -86 -87 -78 -78 -81 -87 -90 -91
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

-75 -80 -85 -90 -95

Number of measurements

Level

AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO A_QUAL_HO=8 A_QUAL_HO=4 A_QUAL_HO=2


Quality
DL Level A_QUAL_HO=8 A_QUAL_HO=4 A_QUAL_HO=2

3 3

3 3

2 2

3 3

3 3 4

3 3 4

3 3 2

3 3 2

3 2 3

3 2 3

3 3 3

3 3 4

4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Number of measurements

Time allowed: 10 minutes

AV_RANGE_HO A_RANGE_HO=8 A_RANGE_HO=4 A_RANGE_HO=2


DL Level 25 A_RANGE_HO=8 A_RANGE_HO=4 20 A_RANGE_HO=2 15

11
Distance

10

10 10

11 12

11 13

13 13

12 14 15

13 14 16

13 16 17

15 17 18

15 17 18

16 18 18

17 19 20

18 19 20

10 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Number of measurements

1 3 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Fill up the table with average function. The chart will be automatically processed The fact that there may not be enough cleared entries to store new measurements is excluded, see justification below: Because the MS must resynchronize at most every 10s with the neighbor cells it monitors, it is useless to keep cells in the book-keeping list which have not been reported for more than 10s, it will be impossible to make a handover towards these cells. Therefore, the overwriting mechanism described above will function correctly if there are less than 32 cells reported in every 10s, which makes an average rate of 3 new cells per second. The potentiality of overflow of the book-keeping list is therefore excluded. The book-keeping is performed according to the BSIC and BCCH frequency couple. This function updates the table every multiframe except if the measurement report is missing or Measurement Valid Bit is set to not valid. When the level of a cell is not reported, a zero must be entered as measurement value. For each multiframe and for each of the NO_NCELL_M cell measurements it receives, the function has to check the BSIC number and the BCCH frequency index (FREQ(n)). When the couple (BSIC, BCCH frequency) is not in the reference list (received from the OMC), the corresponding measurements should be discarded. The BTSnum variable is updated every multiframe except if the measurement report from the MS is missing. It is incremented by the number of new couples (BSIC number, BCCH frequency index) registered as described above. Remark: Two cells can have the same BSIC number or the same BCCH frequency index. Therefore, the couple of these parameters is needed to define a cell.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 27

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 3 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 28

End of Module Radio Measurements Principles

1 3 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Measurements Principles GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12203AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 3 Page 29

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 4 Radio Link Sup and Power Control
3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 1

Blank Page

142
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe Radio Link Supervision and Power control algorithms List the associated parameters

143
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

144
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Radio Link Supervision 2 Power Control Page 7 18

145
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

146
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 6

1 Radio Link Supervision

147
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 7

1 Radio Link Supervision

Functional Entities

Assignment of PC functions in the ALCATEL BSS

BTS
Radio Link Measurements Radio Link Supervision Radio Link Command

BSC

Active Channel Pre-processing

PC Threshold Comparison

PC Command

148
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The two main functions specified in this document and implemented in the Alcatel-Lucent BSS are:

Radio link supervision and radio link command:

These functions handle the detection of the radio link failure so that calls which fail either from loss of radio coverage or unacceptable interference are satisfactorily handled by the network. The radio link supervision is responsible for detection of the loss of the radio link, based on incorrectly received SACCH frames. The radio link command is responsible for commanding to set the power at a maximum level for radio link recovery or to clear the call when the radio link has failed. The radio link recovery can be activated or not, depending on a configuration flag (EN_RL_RECOV). The radio link failure procedure is always running and clears the call when the radio link has failed.

Power control:

This function handles the adaptive control of the RF transmit power from the MS and the BS. The RF power control aims at minimizing the co-channel interference and also at reducing the DC power consumption of the MS. This function is in charge of detecting a need for a power command and then of applying this power command. Therefore it can be divided into two processes: PC threshold comparison and PC command. MS and BS power control are operating independently, they can be activated or not, depending on configuration flags (EN_MS_PC and EN_BS_PC). All these functions require directly or indirectly input parameters provided by the function in charge of the radio link measurements. Most of the input data required by the power control functions are provided by the Active channel preprocessing function. The figure depicts in a general way:

the interconnections between all these functions, the implementation of these functions in the Alcatel-Lucent BSS. All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010
3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 8

1 Radio Link Supervision

Principles

Detection (by BTS) of a radio link failure with an MS


notification to BSC for radio resource release

Try to recover an MS when radio becomes poor


optional mechanism radio link recovery by requiring BTS and MS to transmit at maximum power

Equivalent mechanism in MS for Radio Link Failure detection

149
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The determination of the radio link failure is based on a counter. According to the GSM Technical Specification 05.08 for the BSS, the criterion for incrementing/decrementing this counter should be based:

either on the error rate on the uplink SACCH, or on RXLEV/RXQUAL measurements of the MS.

In the Alcatel-Lucent BSS, it is based on the number of SACCH frames which cannot be decoded. It must be stressed that this criterion is related to the first one recommended above but it is not exactly the same. The Alcatel-Lucent criterion is in fact the one recommended by the GSM Technical Specification 05.08 for the MS.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 9

1 Radio Link Supervision

Principles [Cont.]

For each active radio channel, a counter S is:


decremented by 1 each time an SACCH frame cannot be decoded (BFI=1) incremented by 2 each time a valid SACCH frame is received

There is one counter S at MS side and another one at BTS side The value of S gives a measure of the quality of uplink radio link The initial value of S is RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_BS (at BTS side) and RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT (at MS side)
if S reaches N_BSTXPWR_M, a radio link recovery is triggered (optional) if S reaches 0, a radio link failure is detected

RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT is important because the mobile must release the radio channel first New Radio link Timeout parameters has been introduced for AMR MSs
RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_AMR

1 4 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The radio link supervision function is performed in the BTS and it uses three parameters given to the BTS in the TRX configuration data message:

EN_RL_RECOV: flag enabling/disabling the sending of CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION by the BTS when the need for radio link recovery is detected. N_BSTXPWR_M: threshold for the radio link recovery. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS: threshold (number of SACCH messages) for the radio link failure. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR: threshold (number of SACCH messages) for the radio link failure of calls using an AMR codec.

In addition, the function handles a counter named S. RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS is the initial and maximum value of S.

For each SACCH not decoded, S is decremented by 1 while for each SACCH decoded, it is incremented by 2. The incrementation or decrementation is performed if the following condition is met: RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS(_AMR) >= counter S >= 0. As soon as the counter S is equal to the threshold N_BSTXPWR_M, the radio link recovery is triggered if EN_RL_RECOV = ENABLE. Therefore, in the case where the shadowing is so strong that all SACCH frames are lost, the radio link recovery will be triggered after (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS(_AMR) - N_BSTXPWR_M) SACCH periods.

The parameter N_BSTXPWR_M must be set according this simple behavior. If the radio link recovery is not successful, as soon as S reaches 0, the radio link failure procedure is applied. As soon as a radio link failure is detected, the radio link supervision must be started again in the BTS.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 10

1 Radio Link Supervision

Principles [Cont.]

S value 25

S = f [ BFI(t)]
RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_BS

20 N_BSTXPWR_M 15

10

5 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

SACCH number

BFI S

1 4 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Received Events

Activate supervision: activation of the radio link supervision from the BTS telecom layer 3,

SACCH, BFI = 1: not decoded SACCH frame, SACCH, BFI = 0: decoded SACCH frame.

Note: the BFI flag is internal to the BTS and does not deal with the BFI flag defined by the GSM.

Deactivate supervision: deactivation of the radio link supervision by the BTS telecom layer 3.

Transmitted Events

Radio link recovery: indication sent to the radio link command function in order to set the BS and MS powers to the maximum. Radio link failure: indication sent to the radio link command function in order to release the call.

These events are sent to the BSC in the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message:

In case of Radio link recovery, the BTS sends only once (to avoid overload of the Abis interface) the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message to the BSC with cause "set MS/BS-TXPWR-M (value: '001 1111', reserved for National use). This action (message formatting) is performed by the GSM layer 3. In case of Radio link failure, the BTS sends the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message with cause 'Radio link Failure' to the BSC.

Thus, the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message on Abis is not showing any call drop. One should look at the cause of CONFAIL.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 11

1 Radio Link Supervision

Principles [Cont.]
Start of AMR communication Audio degradation

RLT = 18

RLT_AMR = 18

Start of non AMR communication Audio degradation VQ improvment provided by AMR Start of non AMR communication Audio degradation

AMR an non AMR Call Drop

Start of AMR communication Audio degradation

RLT = 18 RLT_AMR = 26

Start of non AMR communication Audio degradation

Start of AMR communication Audio degradation

Non AMR Call Drop

Extension of the degradation period

AMR Call Drop


1 4 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 12

1 Radio Link Supervision

AMR call

B11

2 different mechanisms in case of AMR calls Either usage of specific threshold: RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR if

AMR is used AND


RSACCH is NOT activated (EN_REP_SACCH = Disabled) OR RDFACCH is NOT activated (EN_REP_DL_FACCH = Disabled)

Or usage of RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS if
Repeated SACCH (RSACCH) is activated AND Repeated Downlink FACCH (RDFACCH) is activated THEN S is decremented by 1 only after the soft combining DRSACCH is dynamically activated depending on S value (See next slide)

1 4 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This means that for an AMR call with RSACCH and RDFACCH are both activated, RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS is used. It may not be enough secured to come back to the RADIOLINK_TIMOUT_BS value when only RSACCH is activated, because RDFACCH improves also the handover in poor radio conditions

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 13

1 Radio Link Supervision

AMR call with RSACCH activated


Repeadted DL SACCH
RADIO_LINK_TIMEOUT_BS 20 N_BSTXPWR_M 15

B11

S value 25

RLR

RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH 10

5 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

SACCH number

BFI S

1 4 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 14

1 Radio Link Supervision

Radio Link Recovery

The BTS sends a Connection Failure Indication message


Cause 001 1111 reserved for national usage (Alcatel-Lucent: RLR) On K1205: set MS/BS_TXPWR_MAX (Alcatel-Lucent only)

The BSC sends BS and MS POWER CONTROL messages


Required for maximum possible values The MS required level is embedded in the SACCH header in the downlink

Optional mechanism
EN_RL_RECOV =ENABLE useless without power control master vs. power control

1 4 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The action consists in increasing the power of the MS and of the BTS to their maximum, in a single step, if the link is failing, i.e. the BTS is not able to decode the SACCH anymore for some period of time. This functionality is performed upon reception of the CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION message (cause set MS/BS-TXPWR-M) from the BTS. This message can be sent by the BTS only if EN_RL_RECOV = ENABLE. Upon reception of this message, the radio link command function: 1. sends to the BTS a power increase command up to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER if the MS is on the inner zone of a concentric or multiband cell) in the BS POWER CONTROL message. 2. sends to the MS a power increase command up to min(MS_TXPWR_MAX,P) (min (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER,P) if the MS is in the inner zone of a concentric or multiband cell) in the message MS POWER CONTROL. When a radio link recovery occurs, the radio link command function gives an indication to the power control function once the power increase has been commanded. The maximum power increase of the MS is 2dB per 60 ms. Thus, if MS_TXPWR_MAX=33dBm and MS_TXPWR_MIN=13dBm, the MS coming from MIN to Max will take 600 ms. Note: the BS Power Control process does not interfere with the recovery procedure since the former comes to a halt when no SACCH multiframe is received. Thus, the BS power control process does not take into account the radio link recovery event.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 15

1 Radio Link Supervision

Radio Link Failure

The BTS sends a Connection Failure Indication message


Cause radio link failure

The BSC notifies the loss to the MSC


Usually Clear Request radio interface failure

The BSC releases locally the radio resource (TCH or SDCCH)


Radio frequency Channel Release message sent to BTS

The call is dropped!

1 4 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The task of the radio link command consists in informing the call control function to release the call. Concentric Cell or Multiband Cell The power value BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER is applied in case of radio link recovery for an MS in the inner zone. The power value BS_TXPWR_MAX is applied in case of radio link recovery for an MS on an outer zone channel. Note: the radio link supervision procedure will function also if SACCH frames are not lost continuously, but with a longer reaction time.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 16

1 Radio Link Supervision

Exercise

With the RLS excel sheet, taking into account the measurements with BFI and the parameter values (N_BSTXPWR_M and RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS), indicate when:
A radio link recovery is triggered A radio link failure is triggered

Radio Link Supervision


Parameters: N_NSTXPWR_MAX N_BSTXPWR_M RLTO_BS 13 18
BFI
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1

S
18 18 17 18 18 18 17 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 13 12 11 10 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 7 6 8 7 6 5 4 3

Action

Radio Link Recovery

Time allowed: 5 minutes

1 4 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 17

2 Power Control

1 4 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 18

2 Power Control

Justification

Power Control aims at: Reducing emitted power to the minimum possible
Minimum power levels:
GSM: 11dBm, 9dBm, 7dBm and 5dBm DCS: 2dBm, 0dBm
RXL EV_U L BS_T
BTS

XPW R

Uplin k Dow nlink

MS_ TXPW R RXL EV_D L

MS

Ensuring quality and received level of peer entity Power Adaptation in real-time
For Uplink PC: decrease UL interference and save MS battery For Downlink PC, decrease DL interference

Power level 14 15 16 17 18 19

Output Power (dBm) GSM-900 15 13 11 9 7 5

Output Power (dBm) DCS-1800 2 0 -

1 4 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The main objective of the power control, in connection with handover algorithms, is to allow a maximum number of MSs to operate in the network while maintaining a minimum interference level. The algorithms must ensure that any mobile is connected with the cell in which the output powers from the MS and the BS are as low as possible (to reduce MS power consumption and interference in the network) while keeping a satisfactory link quality. When on a sufficient duration, the propagation conditions keep worsening, then action must be taken. The first action is to increase the output power levels at the MS or the BS. When the maximum allowed value has been reached, a handover may become necessary. To reflect this philosophy in macrocells (not in microcellular environment), the algorithm allows for handover on quality and strength reasons only when the last step of power control has been reached. If propagation conditions worsen rapidly when the MS is at low power, the power control algorithm allows to reach quickly the maximum power. Nevertheless great care must be taken in choosing the relative values of the thresholds for power control and handover as well as the averaging window sizes (smaller window size and higher threshold for power control than for handover). It must be remembered that, although it is desired that the MS transmits with the lowest possible power, it is more important not to lose a call. Thus early triggering for the power control is possible by choosing small values for the averaging window sizes and higher comparison thresholds.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 19

2 Power Control

Principles

Based on a threshold comparison mechanism Decrease emitted power when received level AND quality measured by peer entity are better than a given value Increase emitted power when the received level OR quality is lower than a given value Does not decrease power if the resulting level is below the low level threshold FEATURE REAL FAST PC GIVES REACTIVITY TO THE ALGORITHMS

1 4 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The threshold comparison process detects the need to change the MS power level. This detection is done by comparison between the averaged values produced by the active channel pre-processing function and thresholds.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 20

2 Power Control

Power Control Detection

MS Power control (for BS PC, replace MS by BS and UL by DL)


Quality 1 2

U_RXQUAL_UL_P

L_RXQUAL_UL_P

2 3

Level -95 -90 L_RXLEV_UL_P -93 -86 -85 -75 U_RXLEV_UL_P

POW_RED_STEP_SIZE

1 4 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

A need for a PC command is detected when one of the conditions above is true. Then, the information for the execution of the PC command is given to the PC command process. The MS power control function can be disabled with a flag EN_MS_PC. This flag is changeable from the OMC-R. Note: The GSM coding of quality is contra-intuitive, since the value 0 codes for the best quality and 7 for the worst. Thus, the comparison between two quality values must be understood in the opposite way in terms of quality. Note: POW_RED_STEP_SIZE is used in two ways: for PC_COMMAND (decrease of MS power) and for PC_THRESHOD_COMPARISON (to avoid ping-pong effect).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 21

2 Power Control

MS PC Threshold Comparison

MS Power increase: If
AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC > L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_PC < L_RXLEV_UL_P Then PC_COMMAND(MS, INC, MS_P_INC dB, <min(MS_TXPWR_MAX, P))

Power decrease: If
AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC < U_RXQUAL_UL_P and AV_RXLEV_UL_PC >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + POW_RED_STEP_SIZE AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC U_RXQUAL_UL_P and AV_RXLEV_UL_PC > U_RXLEV_UL_P Then PC_COMMAND(MS, RED, MS_P_RED dB, >MS_TXPWR_MIN)

1 4 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH is an internal variable that is equal to 0 in case of Non-Hopping cell and OFFSET_HOPPING_PC in case of BBH or RH.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 22

2 Power Control

MS Power Control Command

MS Power command philosophy:


Target received level TARGET_RXLEV_UL
middle threshold between U_RXLEV_UL_P and L_RXLEV_UL_P

Adaptive power step size


According to the average received level Limited power step size to MAX_POW_INC and MAX_POW_RED If only Quality problem: fixed power step size POW_INC_STEP_SIZE and POW_RED_STEP_SIZE Two weighting factors to modify the algorithm reactivity when level problem POW_INC_FACTOR for power increase POW_RED_FACTOR for power decrease

1 4 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Whenever any of the threshold conditions occurs, a PC command must be sent to the MS over the air interface. In order to compute the adaptive power step size, the middle threshold between the upper threshold U_RXLEV_UL_P and the lower threshold L_RXLEV_UL_P is considered. This threshold is regarded as the target received level around which the MS should always stay. The following algorithm tries to maintain and bring the MS power closer to this target threshold. The size of the power step is limited to MAX_POW_INC for an increase of the MS power and MAX_POW_RED for a decrease of the MS power. When the received level is between the two thresholds U_RXLEV_UL_P and L_RXLEV_UL_P (i.e. no need to change the level) and a power control on quality cause is triggered, fixed power step sizes are applied: POW_INC_STEP_SIZE for power increase and POW_RED_STEP_SIZE for power decrease. Two weighting factors POW_INC_FACTOR (for power increase) and POW_RED_FACTOR (for power decrease) allow to modify the reactivity of the algorithm (the more POW_INC_FACTOR is nearby 1, the greater the reactivity of the algorithm is and the larger the power step size is). The target received level is TARGET_RXLEV_UL for the uplink path. TARGET_RXLEV_UL corresponds to the next higher multiple of 1 dB from (U_RXLEV_UL_P + L_RXLEV_UL_P)/2.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 23

2 Power Control

Fast and Normal Comparison

Example: Example

Need for PC Command detected PC Command

Power level (dB)

Normal Power Control Fast Power Control

-80

-90

20 dB 6 dB (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)

-100

-110 0 480 960 1440 1920 2400

Time (ms)

MR 2 4 SACCH = 1 Measurement Report (MR)


1 4 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MR 3

MR 4

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 24

2 Power Control

MS Power Increase Command Computation

PC_COMMAND (MS, INC, MS_P_INC dB, < power max)


If MS_TXPWR < power max then increase MS_TXPWR by min(MS_P_INC, MAX_POW_INC, powermaxMS_TXPWR) Where MS_P_INC is evaluated by the following algorithm: if (AV_RXLEV_UL_PC < L_RXLEV_UL_P) (problem of level) if (AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC L_RXQUAL_UL_P + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH) (sufficient quality) then MS_P_INC = roundup[ POW_INC_FACTOR* (TARGET_RXLEV_UL AV_RXLEV_UL_PC)] else MS_P_INC = roundup[ MAX ( POW_INC_FACTOR * (TARGET_RXLEV_UL AV_RXLEV_UL_PC ), POW_INC_STEP_SIZE )] else (problem of quality) MS_P_INC = POW_INC_STEP_SIZE

1 4 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In the equations:

MS_TXPWR is the last MS_TXPWR_CONF value reported by the BTS. roundup means round to its next higher multiple of 2 dB. rounddown means round to its next lower multiple of 2 dB.

The rate of change of MS power is required to be one nominal 2 dB step every 60 msec. Thus a 30 dB step change should be accomplished in 900 msec. The operator should be warned of this as it may impact on the choice of settings for MS_P_CON_ACK and MS_P_CON_INT. Then the ordered value of the MS transmit power, called MS_TXPWR, is sent to the MS as follows:

The BSC sends the MS POWER CONTROL message to the BTS (i.e. to the TRX handling the relevant channel) which then forwards the PC command to the MS in the Layer 1 header.

The MS applies the PC command and confirms this action by transmitting the applied power value (MS_TXPWR_CONF) on the uplink SACCH in the layer 1 header.

On SACCH channel, the MS may not send the MEASUREMENT REPORT message (e.g. in case of transmission of Short Message). In this case, the BSC receives a MEASUREMENT RESULT message which does not contain the MEASUREMENT REPORT. The BSC takes into account the MS_TXPWR_CONF variable.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 25

2 Power Control

MS Power Decrease Command Computation

PC_COMMAND (MS, RED, MS_P_RED dB, > power min)


If MS_TXPWR > power min then decrease MS_TXPWR by min(MS_P_RED, MAX_POW_RED, MS_TXPWRpower min) Where MS_P_RED is evaluated by the following algorithm: if (AV_RXLEV_UL_PC > U_RXLEV_UL_P) (good level) if (AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC U_RXQUAL_UL_P) (sufficient quality) then MS_P_RED = rounddown[ MAX(POW_RED_FACTOR* (AV_RXLEV_UL_PCTARGET_RXLEV_UL), 2dB)] else MS_P_RED = rounddown[ MAX ( POW_RED_FACTOR * (AV_RXLEV_UL_PCTARGET_RXLEV_UL), POW_RED_STEP_SIZE )] else (good quality) MS_P_RED = POW_RED_STEP_SIZE

1 4 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 26

2 Power Control

Frequency Hopping Cases

OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH
This variable allows to take into account the frequency hopping in the RxQual evaluation (see Annex)

Defined on a per cell basis Algorithm: If Frequency hopping applied


then OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = Offset_hopping_PC Else OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0

1 4 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In order to take into account the frequency hopping in the RXQUAL evaluation, the variable OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH is introduced. If Frequency hopping is applied on the corresponding channel then OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = Offset_Hopping_PC otherwise OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0 Offset_Hopping_PC is a parameter defined on a per cell basis. PC Downlink in Frequency Hopping Case

In this case, the BSC inhibits the BS power control on all the channels which use the BCCH carrier. The entity performing the BS power control in the BSC gets all the information concerning a new channel and decides whether to activate the BS power control for this channel. The power control must be inhibited when the frequency used by the new channel is the same as the frequency used for the BCCH in the BTS (cell) in which the channel is activated. For any channel which has the BCCH frequency in its hopping sequence (MA), the MS is measuring a very good downlink level each time it hops on the BCCH. To avoid that this results in a too optimistic average, it is possible to require from the MS not to include the BCCH measurement in the averages. This is achieved by setting the PWRC flag to 1 in the SYSTEM INFORMATION type 6 message sent by the BSS on the SACCH. If the channel is hopping only on the BCCH frequency (after a transmitter failure), it is considered as a nonhopping channel and it is concerned by the non-frequency hopping case.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 27

2 Power Control

Power Control Timers

Timers
T_SDCCH_PC allows the inhibition of PC on SDCCH When a new power is required, the confirmation is awaited:
MS_P_CON_ACK BS_P_CON_ACK

As soon as the new power is acknowledged, a fixed duration is awaited to trigger a new change of power, if necessary:
MS_P_CON_INT BS_P_CON_INT

1 4 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The timer T_SDCCH_PC allows to inhibit the MS and BS power control on SDCCH:
This timer is changeable at the OMC-R level on a per cell basis. It is triggered upon receipt of the ESTABLISH INDICATION message after SDCCH activation for immediate assignment procedure. As long as the timer runs, the power control is inhibited on SDCCH.

If the timer expires, the power control will be enabled again on SDCCH. If the timer is running at the sending of the RF CHANNEL RELEASE message, the timer is stopped.

T_SDCCH_PC is useful in case of long SDCCH phases. During SDCCH for call establishment, PC disabled should be preferred with a view to secure call setup. Nevertheless, if SMS usage is very high, SDCCH phases may be long. In this case, to avoid interference, PC will be enabled after T_SDCCH_PC expiry (about 5s). After any PC command is sent to the MS, some time must be expected before MS_TXPWR_CONF (power confirmation sent by the MS on the uplink SACCH) can reach the desired value. The timer MS_P_CON_ACK is triggered after any power modification command to monitor that the desired transmission power MS_TXPWR is reached.
If MS_P_CON_ACK elapses before the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received, the power control decision process is resumed immediately with the last MS_TXPWR_CONF received. If the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received before the timer MS_P_CON_ACK is elapsed, the timer MS_P_CON_ACK is stopped and the timer MS_P_CON_INT is triggered. Then the MS PC threshold comparison process is resumed with MS_TXPWR_CONF for the same MS as soon as MS_P_CON_INT expires.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 28

2 Power Control

Power Control Timers [cont.]

IF xx_P_CON_ACK is expiring, it is a system problem:


Wrong setting of xx_P_CON_ACK (too short) No reception of power command by the MS
a radio link recovery can be activated

Problem on Abis
repetition of BS power command

The expiry of P_CON_INT is a normal mechanism

1 4 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 29

2 Power Control

Extra Information

B11

LEVEL and QUALITY USED in EQUATION are average ones with window size A_QUAL_PC and A_LEV_PC BS POWER CONTROL INHIBITED ON BCCH frequency
BCCH must be emitted at the maximum level

MS dynamic constraint
minimum 2dB every 60 ms

Emitted power can be changed by radio link supervision algorithm


Radio link supervision has a greater priority

Activation of power control can slow down HO decision


some causes can be triggered only if the MS (BTS) is emitting at the maximum power

PC Thresholds in case of AMR calls


If RSACCH and RFACCH are activated then

Modified B11

L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH is replaced by L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH is replaced by L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH


1 4 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Interaction with Radio Link Command The MS power control function is informed of a radio link recovery by the radio link command function. Once the indication is received, the PC command process is resumed immediately:

timer MS_P_CON_ACK is started (or reset and started if running),

If MS_P_CON_ACK elapses before the expected value of MS_TXPWR_CONF is received, the power control decision process is resumed immediately with MS_TXPWR_CONF = min(MS_TXPWR_MAX,P).

According to GSM Technical Specification 05.08 section 7.1, the BCCH carrier must be broadcast with a constant power in the cell. In this release of the Alcatel-Lucent BSS, this constant value is set to the maximum power allowed in the cell that is defined by the parameter BS_TXPWR_MAX. This means that all dedicated channels (TCH, SDCCH) which are on the BCCH frequency must always be transmitted with the maximum power, i.e. the BCCH power must not be changed by the BS power control function.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 30

2 Power Control

Exercise

Power control UL (Remark: Use the default parameters document)


What happens if we do not use Frequency Hopping? Why is it better to have A_LEV_PC=A_LEV_HO/2? Thresholds:
Lower QUAL of RX uplink = 3 High QUAL of RX uplink = 2 Lower LEV of RX uplink = -90dBm Upper LEV of RX uplink = -75dBm POW_RED_STEP_SIZE= 4 POW_INC_STEP_SIZE= 6

Put the right threshold in the next slide chart


Time allowed: 25 minutes

1 4 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 31

2 Power Control

Exercise [cont.]

Power control UL For each case:


PC triggered? Step size value?

Quality

With POW_INC_FACTOR = 0,6 and POW_RED_FACTOR = 0,6 and MAX_POW_INC = MAX_POW_RED = 8

Level

Nb of case AV RXQUAL UL PC AV RXLEV UL PC Power control Delta value


1 4 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

1 0 -98

2 1 -80

3 2 -73

4 6 -69

5 3 -86

6 4 -91

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 32

2 Power Control

Exercise [cont.]

Power control DL
Thresholds: L_RXLEV_DL_P = -85dBm U_RXLEV_DL_P = -75dBm L_RXQUAL_DL_P = 2.9 U_RXQUAL_DL_P = 1 A_QUAL_PC = 4 A_LEV_PC = 4 POW_INC_FACTOR = 0.6 POW_RED_FACTOR = 0.8 MAX_POW_INC = 16dB MAX_POW_RED = 16dB BS_P_CON_ACK = 3s BS_TXPWR_MIN = -16dB

Using the Trace Abis Excel file, find each parameter value: POW_INC_STEP_SIZE = ? BS_P_CON_INT = ? POW_RED_STEP_SIZE = ? OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0 or 1 ? Which phenomenon can you observe as regards the successive PC commands?

1 4 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 33

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 4 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 34

End of Module Radio Link Sup and Power Control

1 4 35
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Radio Link Sup and Power Control GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12204AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 4 Page 35

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 5 Handover Algorithms
3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 1

Blank Page

152
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the Power control and Handover algorithms List the associated parameters

153
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

154
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Handover Detection 2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation 3 Exercise Page 7 91 101

155
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!
Page

156
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 6

1 Handover Detection

157
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 7

1 Handover Detection

Handover Main Objective

Send connected MS to another cell


When needed: rescue/emergency handover If useful: better cell handover

Toward the best cell


From a radio point of view
Power budget Level

From a traffic point of view


Less loaded target

From a dynamic point of view


MS speed History of the call

From an operator point of view

158
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Emergency Intercell Handovers These handovers are triggered when the call conditions deteriorate significantly in order to rescue the call. The causes are: "too low quality" , "too low level", " too long MS-BS distance", too short MS-BS distance, "consecutive bad SACCH frames", "level dropping under high threshold". Better Cell HO These handovers are triggered to improve the overall system traffic capacity. This spans: interference reduction, signaling load reduction, traffic unbalance smoothing. The basic assumption for these handovers is that they should respect the cell planning decided by the operator. The causes are: "power budget", "high level in neighbor lower layer cell for slow mobile", "high level in neighbor cell in the preferred band" , traffic handover.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 8

1 Handover Detection

Principle

The BSC analyzes averaged measurement results:


active channel pre-processing (measurements averaging and book-keeping) To detect need/utility to handover
Handover detection process

To choose/rank target cells according to several criteria


Candidate cell evaluation process

To perform the handover


Handover management process

159
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 9

1 Handover Detection

Functional Entities
Assignment of HO functions in the ALCATEL BSS

BTS
Radio Link Measurements Active Channel Pre-processing

BSC

HO Preparation
HO Detection HO Candidate Cell Evaluation

HO Management

MSC

HO Protocol

1 5 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The HO Preparation function can also be named "handover algorithms" as the algorithms described are the "heart" of this function.

The Alcatel-Lucent handover preparation is derived from the basic algorithm found in Annex A of the GSM Technical Specification 05.08.

The handover preparation is in charge of detecting a need for handover and proposing a list of target cells. Therefore it can be divided into two processes: handover detection and handover candidate cell evaluation.

The handover detection process analyzes the radio measurements reported by the BTS and triggers the candidate cell evaluation process each time a handover cause (emergency or better cell type) is fulfilled. The handover candidate cell evaluation works out a list of possible candidate cells for the handover. This list is sorted according to the evaluation of each cell as well as the layer they belong to (in a hierarchical network) and the frequency band they use (in a multiband network). Once the handover preparation is completed, the handover decision and execution (handover management entity) is performed under the MSC or BSC control. The directed retry preparation is performed by the handover preparation function. Once the directed retry preparation is completed, the directed retry is performed either under the BSC control (internal directed retry) or under the MSC control (external directed retry). An example of implementation of these functions except for directed retry is given in the GSM Technical Specification 05.08. The handover preparation requires indirectly input parameters provided by the function in charge of the radio link measurements. Most of the input data required by the handover functions are provided by a function called: Active channel preprocessing. The figure above depicts in a general way:

the interconnections between these functions, the implementation of these functions in the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 10

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes Detection


Based on the contents of the measurement results The BSC is computing the need or utility to trigger a handover 25 HO causes, split into 2 main categories:
Emergency handover
quality, level, distance, etc.

Better cell handover


power budget, traffic, etc.

Some are specific to hierarchical and concentric architectures

1 5 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The process is achieved in the BSC. Each time a set of pre-processed (averaged) measurements is available, this process checks whether a handover is needed. If the need for a handover is detected, the target cell evaluation process is triggered. In case of a handover alarm, the handover detection process gives to the cell evaluation process:

the preferred target cell layer: lower, upper or none.

the raw candidate cell list, which can be either all neighbors, or the subset which verifies the handover causes (plus other specific cells in particular cases). With each cell is given one of the handover causes which have been verified. The cause of handover.

Four main handover categories are provided, depending on the cause of handover and the context of application. The context of application for a handover is either "intercell" (the handover is performed between two different cells) or "intracell" (the handover is performed in the same cell). The detection of a need for handover is performed through handover causes which are going to be detailed. The cause of handover is based either on a situation of emergency (this cause is therefore called "emergency cause") or on the existence of better conditions. In this last case, the name of the cause depends on the context of application: for intercell handovers, it is called "Better cell cause". For intracell handovers, it is called "Better zone cause", as it is applied only in the case of interzone handovers in concentric or multiband cells.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 11

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes

B11

16 HO causes for standard networks (26 on the whole)


Emergency HO
Cause 2 Cause 3 Cause 4 Cause 5 Cause 6 Too low quality on the uplink Too low level on the uplink Too low quality on the downlink Too low level on the downlink Too long distance between the MS and the BTS Cause 24 General capture

Better conditions HO
Cause 12 Power budget evaluation Cause 20 Forced directed retry Cause 23 Traffic

Cause 27 AMR channel adaptation HO (FR to HR) Cause 28 Fast traffic HO Modified B11 Cause 29 TFO HO 30 Move from PS to CS zone

Cause 15 High interference on the uplink (intracell HO) Cause 16 High interference on the downlink (intracell HO) Cause 26 AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
1 5 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

HO causes for Extended Cells: Emergency causes:

cause 22: too short MS-BTS distance

HO causes for hierarchical or multiband network:

Emergency causes

cause 7: consecutive bad SACCH frames received in a microcell cause 17: too low level on the uplink in a microcell compared to a high threshold cause 18: too low level on the downlink in a microcell compared to a high threshold cause 14: high level in neighbor lower layer cell for slow mobile cause 21: high level in neighbor cell in the preferred band

Better causes

HO causes for Concentric cells:

Emergency causes

cause 10: too low level on the uplink in the inner zone cause 11: too low level on the downlink in the inner zone cause 13: Outer zone level uplink and downlink

Better causes

HO causes inter techno: Cause 31: 2G to 3G HO

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 12

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 2: UL Quality

CAUSE 2: too low quality on the Uplink


AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO > L_RXQUAL_UL_H + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO <= RXLEV_UL_IH and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX) and EN_RXQUAL_UL= ENABLE

Quality

Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO

Level

1 5 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Quality and Level causes (2, 3, 4, 5, 15, 16) The aim of these causes is to keep the call going when the radio link is degrading otherwise the radio link failure might be detected and the call released. These causes wait generally for the power control process to increase the BTS and MS power to their maximum values, except for the causes specific to microcellular environment. Handover on "too low level" is used to avoid situations where the interference level is low, while the attenuation is quite high. These conditions may appear for example in big city streets which enable a line of sight propagation from the BTS antenna. There is in this case a risk of abrupt quality degradation, if the MS moves away from the line of sight street. In case of simultaneous low-level and low-quality signals, an intercell handover is requested.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 13

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 3: UL Level

CAUSE 3: too low level on the uplink


AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO <= L_RXQUAL_UL_H + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO < L_RXLEV_UL_H Quality and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX) and EN_RXLEV_UL= ENABLE Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
Level

1 5 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 14

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 4: DL Quality

CAUSE 4: too low quality on the downlink


AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO > L_RXQUAL_DL_H + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO <= RXLEV_DL_IH and BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX and EN_RXQUAL_DL= ENABLE Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO

Quality

Level

1 5 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 15

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 5: DL Level

CAUSE 5: too low level on the downlink


AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO <= L_RXQUAL_DL_H + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH AV_RXLEV_DL_HO < L_RXLEV_DL_H BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX Quality and EN_RXLEV_DL= ENABLE Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO
Level

1 5 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 16

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 6: Distance

CAUSE 6: Too long distance between the MS and the BTS


AV_RANGE_HO > U_TIME_ADVANCE and EN_DIST_HO= ENABLE
Good level but

Too long distance

BTS

Size of window for distance averaging: A_RANGE_HO


1 5 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This cause is used when a dominant cell provides a lot of scattered coverages inside other cells, due to propagation conditions of the operational network. The consequence of these spurious coverages is the probable production of a high level of co-channel interference. This cause is different from the others as it is more preventive. It does not make use of the propagation conditions of a call. It just does not allow an MS to talk to a BTS if it is too far away. It may happen for example that some peculiar propagation conditions exist at one point in time that provide exceptional quality and level although the serving BTS is far and another is closer and should be the one the mobile should be connected to if the conditions were normal. It may then happen that these exceptional conditions suddenly drop and the link is lost, which would not have happened if the mobile had been connected to the closest cell. So for these reasons, this cause does not wait for the power control to react.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 17

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget

Cause 12 (Power Budget) principle


Decision based mainly on comparison of serving and neighbor cells for:
downlink level of serving and neighbor cells maximum emitting level of MS

Aiming at decreasing UL & DL emitted power Should be the normal handover type
no matter of emergency

1 5 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In this case, there is another cell with a better power budget i.e., the link quality can be improved or maintained with a reduced transmit power of both the MS and the BTS. The radio link is not degraded but there is the opportunity to decrease the overall interference level by changing the serving cell of the given MS. In conjunction with power control, it presents the advantage to keep the interference as low as possible, since it minimizes the path loss between the BTS and the MS. This cause is especially designed to cope with the requirement that the mobile should be connected with the cell with which the lowest possible output powers are used. To assess which of the cells is this "best cell", the algorithm performs every measurement reporting period the comparison of the path loss in the current and in the neighbor cell. This is a feature special to GSM which is made possible because the mobile measures the adjacent cell signal levels and reports the six best ones. This power budget gives the difference in path loss between the current cell and the adjacent cells reported by the mobile. When PBGT(n) is greater than 0, then the path loss from cell n is less than the path loss from the serving cell and thus the radiated power in the downlink direction, and therefore in the uplink direction as well, will be lower in cell n than in the current cell. However it would not be advisable to hand over the MS to another cell as soon as PBGT is greater than 0, because the MS would probably oscillate between the two adjacent cells as the propagation conditions vary. An hysteresis mechanism is implemented to avoid this undesirable effect. No PBGT between different layers. Ok between different bands if EN_INTERBAND_PBGT_HO = 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 18

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

Power Budget computation


PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO - (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

1 5 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The MS may be handed over from the serving cell indexed 0 to a neighbor cell indexed n only if the power budget exceeds the handover Margin(0,n). The handover Margin(0,n) can be modified according to the traffic situation in the serving cell and the neighbor cell n. In this way, power budget handover can be delayed towards a loaded cell and traffic load handover can be triggered from a loaded cell. Once the MS is handed over, the same algorithm is applied in the new cell, and a new PBGT is computed (which will be close to the opposite value of PBGT in the old cell) and compared to a new HOMargin. (Thus, the global hysteresis (from cell 0 to cell n and back to cell 0) is the sum of the two HOMargins). However, it is still possible that a ping-pong mechanism is created by different handover causes, for instance a handover may be triggered towards a neighbor cell for bad quality, but in the neighbor cell, a handover back may be triggered for power budget reasons. In order to avoid this, an additional anti-ping-pong mechanism is implemented in the power budget calculation. It enables to penalize for a certain time the cell on which the call has been before. In case of handover from SDCCH to SDCCH, this cause does not take the traffic situation into account. In multiband cell environment, the mobile can operate in a different band than the frequency band of the BCCHs. This can lead to circular ping-pong handovers from the inner zone if the new band is DCS 1800 or to the impossibility to trigger PBGT handovers from the inner zone if the preferred band is GSM 900. To avoid this problem, when the MS is in the inner zone of a multiband cell, it may be handed over from the serving cell indexed 0 to a neighbor multiband cell indexed n only if the power budget exceeds the handover Margin(0,n) plus the offset handover margin which allows to handicap or favor the PBGT (In the inner zone, the cause power budget is only checked between multiband cells, in a way to maintain the MS in the preferred band). The offset handover margin can possibly be used in concentric cells.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 19

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

Power Budget Variables


AV_RXLEV_NCELL
received level of BCCH of neighbor cell

PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO - (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
received level of serving cell (BCCH or not)

AV_RXLEV_NCELL - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO
the highest is the best neighbor cell but serving might not be at the maximum level (with DL power control)

necessity to have a corrective factor

1 5 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

BCCH = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - (AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO + C)


with C = BS_TXPWR_MAX - AV_BS_TXPWR_HO. This corresponds to the difference of received BCCH signal levels. A correction factor C is taken into account for the serving cell, because the received signal level (i.e. AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO) may not be measured on BCCH.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 20

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

Receive Level correcting factor


BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO

PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO - (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

BS_TXPWR_MAX are attenuations, not absolute level

= (bts_max_power+BS_TXPWR_MAX) (bts_max_power+AV_BS_TXPWR_HO)

AV_BS_TXPWR_HO: average of BS_POWER over A_PBGT_HO measurements corrective factor used to compensate for the fact that the serving cell may not emit at the maximum level

AV_RXLEV_NCELL-[AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO+(BS_TXPWR_MAXAV_BS_TXPWR_HO)]
compare received level of neighbor and serving cells as if the serving one was emitting at the maximum level

1 5 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 21

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

Power Budget parameters


MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX

PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO - (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

maximum emitting power for the MS in neighbor cell n maximum emitting power for the MS in the serving cell

MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX
Corrective factor to compensate for the difference of maximum power of each cell

MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX = bts_max_power(n) - bts_max_power


which should be the case if delta_path_loss is equilibrated if not exact, can be corrected with HO_MARGIN(0,n)

1 5 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Then, another correction factor must be taken into account because the maximum BS powers of the serving and neighbor cells may be different:

TXPWR= MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX.


As the first step of calculation is based on the downlink parameters, this correction factor should be based on the maximum BS powers used in the serving and neighbor cells. Two reasons (which are not completely de-correlated) for not using the BS powers can be envisaged:
for a given cell, the GSM does not specify formally the maximum BS power of the neighbor cells. Only BS_TXPWR_MAX is defined (it is sent on the air interface),

it is not easy for the evaluating BSC to know the maximum BS powers of the neighbor cells.

The use of the maximum MS powers requires that the difference of MS powers is equal to the difference of BS powers. This condition is met in most cases. If it is not the case, the difference can be corrected by the operator with the HO_MARGIN(0,n) parameter (HO hysteresis). PBGT >0: the neighbor cell is more advantageous as the path loss is lower than in the current cell. PBGT <0: the serving cell is more advantageous than the current cell.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 22

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

CAUSE 12: Power budget


Hysteresis to avoid ping-pong HO

PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO - (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

Static hysteresis defined for each couple of cells: HO_MARGIN (0,n)


can also be used to correct delta_path_loss

Dynamic penalty for call coming from cell n: ping_pong_margin(n,call_ref)


penalty PING_PONG_HCP applied during a limited duration: T_HCP not used if call arrived with a forced directed retry penalty defined on a cell basis

1 5 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The main drawback of this handover category is the risk of "ping-pong " effect, which is an oscillating back and forth handover between two (or three) cells. As the "better cell" handovers are meant to find the "best cell", the variation of the radio conditions will trigger a big amount of better cell handovers, if the algorithms have a too sensitive reaction. Hence, some mechanisms are forecast, in order to prevent these oscillations from occurring repeatedly at given places. PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) is a penalty put on the cell n if:

it is the immediately precedent cell on which the call has been, this cell belongs to the same BSC as the serving cell, the call has not performed a forced directed retry towards the serving cell, less than T_HCP seconds have elapsed since the last handover.

In this case PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) = PING_PONG_HCP If the call was not precedently on cell n, or if the preceding cell was external, or if the call has just performed a forced directed retry, or if the timer T_HCP has expired, then PING_PONG_MARGIN(n,call_ref) = 0

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 23

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

CAUSE 12: Power budget


ping_pong_margin example

Case 1

Case 3

Case 2

C e ll
1 2 3
1 5 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

C e ll
OK

C e ll

Not a ping-pong case Ping-pong case A Ping-pong case B

OK with Static margin (HO_MARGIN) OK due to T_HCP expiry


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This chart shows the efficiency of the anti-ping-pong mechanism. But, never forget that the anti-ping-pong mechanism distorts the serving areas of the cells. This is why interference problems might occur when enabling this mechanism. Tuning PING_PONG_HCP parameter is thus very important. Warning: this mechanism is not applied for emergency handovers (new mechanism in B7 exists for capture HO, based on T_INHIBIT_CPT timer).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 24

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

CAUSE 12 (Power budget) detection


EN_PBGT_HO = ENABLE

AND AND

AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO If EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) = DISABLE PBGT(n) > HO _MARGIN(0,n) +OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER Else PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER + max(0, DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n))

(n=1BTSnum)

Size of window for level averaging: A_PBGT_HO


1 5 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Cause 12 HO is correlated with HO cause 23. This is why there are two equations according to the activation of HO cause 23 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 25

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]

Mechanism to avoid PBGT HO if the level from the serving cell is high enough RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO: threshold above which it is not necessary to trigger a handover on power budget AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO: average of the received levels over A_PBGT_HO measurements Specific to particular algorithms (not mentioned in this course) OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER: offset which allows to take into account the radio differences between outer and inner zones (especially in case of multi-band cells)

1 5 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO: Dense Network Handover Regulator features The feature aims at optimizing the better cell handovers, especially in the microcellular environment. In very dense networks, there is a lot of overlapping between adjacent cells: a better cell handover will be realized very often. Since B6, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS tunes the number of handovers performed to the accurate need by taking into account the level received by the serving cell. Therefore, the best trade-off between quality of speech and intempestive handovers is achieved. Why?
Especially in microcellular environment (where cell radius is smaller), the better cell HO (based on Power Budget) is likely to be performed at a high rate to the detriment of the quality.

But it is necessary to maintain the better cell HO.

How? With a modification of the power budget triggering cause. Principles HO cause 12 (Power Budget HO) is modified and takes into account the received downlink level of the serving cell (new criterion): if the received level is high enough, there is no need to perform an HO. Consequence Less HOs when the number of overlapping cells is high.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 26

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]


Specific to traffic considerations DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n): evaluated according to the traffic situation of the serving cell and the neighbor cell n (Traffic_load(n)) in the following way: If Traffic_load(0) = high and Traffic_load(n) = low,
DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin

If Else

Traffic_load(0) = low and Traffic_load(n) = high,


DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = DELTA_INC_HO_margin DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) = 0

Philosophy This mechanism aims at penalizing cause 12 detection when the traffic in the serving cell is low and is high in the cell n.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 5 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) is evaluated according to the traffic situation of the serving cell and the neighbor cell n (Traffic_load(n)) in the following way:

If Traffic_load(0)=high and Traffic_load(n)=low

DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)= -DELTA_DEC_HO_margin DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)= DELTA_INC_HO_margin where DELTA_DEC_HO_margin allows the cause 23 (traffic handover) detection.

If Traffic_load(0)=low and Traffic_load(n)=high

else DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n)=0

When the traffic in the serving cell is high and is low in the cell n: DELTA_INC_HO_margin allows to penalize the cause 12 detection when the traffic in the serving cell is low and is high in the cell n. Note: In the case of concentric or multiband cells, if the channel is in the inner zone (ZONE_TYPE = INNER), BS_TXPWR_MAX and MS_TXPWR_MAX in equation must be replaced by BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER and MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER respectively. If the channel is in the outer zone (ZONE_TYPE = OUTER), the formulation of equation is not changed. Note: The value of PBGT(n) is calculated every SACCH period for each neighbor cell n whose measures are kept in the book-keeping list.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 27

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12: Power Budget [cont.]


Traffic_load() is a function managed for every cell of a BSC Traffic_load() can have three values:
high: cell is loaded low: cell is unloaded indefinite: cell is neither loaded nor unloaded

Traffic_load() value is modified according to the long-term traffic evaluation algorithm using the following parameters:
A_TRAFFIC_LOAD, N_TRAFFIC_LOAD, HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD, IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD, LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD: can be modified per cell TCH_INFO_PERIOD: cannot be modified

1 5 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TCH_INFO_PERIOD = 5s period used by the BSC to count the number of free TCHs. More details are provided in Annex.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 28

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 23: Traffic

CAUSE 23: Traffic Handover


DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) < 0dB AND PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGNIN_INNER DELTA_HO_MARGI (0,n) (n=1BTSnum) EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) = ENABLE +

AND

Size of window for level averaging: A_PBGT_HO

1 5 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The principle of this handover is to reduce the size of the serving cell when it is high-loaded relatively to a lowloaded cell. When the mobile moves away from the BTS, the power budget will increase and a better cell handover will be triggered earlier. It is recommended to inhibit Traffic handover towards 1-TRX cells. These cells do not have enough resources to receive incoming handovers due to congestion of neighbor cells. Moreover because of the great variation of traffic in the 1-TRX cells, traffic load is never considered as low. This cause is inhibited for handover from SDCCH to SDCCH. Cause 23 is checked over all the neighboring cells belonging to the same layer. It means that it is checked between cells whose CELL_LAYER_TYPE is single or upper, between cells whose CELL_LAYER_TYPE is lower, and between cells whose CELL_LAYER_TYPE is indoor. In addition to the condition on the cell layer type, the cell frequency band condition for checking Cause 23 is as follows whether or not the MS is in the inner zone of a multi-band cell: a) The MS is not in the inner zone of a multi-band cell:

If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to disabled, Cause 23 must not be checked between cells which use different frequency bands (i.e cells having different CELL_BAND_TYPE). If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to enabled, Cause 23 will be checked over all the neighboring cells without any cell frequency band restriction. If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to disabled, Cause 23 is checked over all the neighboring cell multi-band cells (FREQUENCY_RANGE= PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800) which belong to the same BSC as the serving cell. If the flag EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO is set to enabled, Cause 23 will be checked over all the neighboring cells without any cell frequency band restriction. 2010 All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent
3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 29

b) The MS is in the inner zone of a multi-band cell:

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 23: Traffic [cont.]

CAUSE 23: Traffic Handover


DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) computation is already described in Cause 12 HO DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) < 0dB means that
The serving cell is loaded The target cell is unloaded

PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN(0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER + DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) (n=1BTSnum)


This constraint is less discriminative than Cause 12 In specific traffic distribution, this cause is triggered before cause 12

1 5 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 30

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes 12 & 23 Interworking

Cause 12 & 23: A dynamic way to handle traffic load


PBGT (n2) Handover from n1 to n2

N2 loaded PBGT Handover


HO_MARGING(n1, n2) + DELTA_INC_HO_margin HO_MARGING(n1, n2)

PBGT Handover Traffic Handover

HO_MARGING(n1, n2) - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin

Traffic_load(n2)=high Traffic_load(n1)=low

Other cases

Traffic_load(n2)=low Traffic_load(n1)=high

Traffic_load

HO_MARGING(n2, n1) - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin

HO_MARGING(n2, n1)

Traffic Handover
HO_MARGING(n2, n1) + DELTA_INC_HO_margin

PBGT Handover PBGT Handover N1 loaded

2 x HO_MARGIN + DELTA_INC_HO_margin - DELTA_DEC_HO_margin

2 x HO_MARGIN

PBGT (n1)
1 5 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

Handover from n2 to n1
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The figure represents the triggering areas of PBGT and traffic handovers according to the traffic load in the serving cell and in the neighbor cell.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 31

1 Handover Detection

Directed Retry Principles

Directed Retry is:


an SDCCH to TCH intercell handover Triggered during call setup procedure

If the serving cell is completely congested, the MS is allocated an SDCCH If no TCH is available, the MS is queued
Under certain conditions, the MS obtains TCH in another cell

SDCCH-TCH handover on:


better condition or emergency causes = Directed Retry cause 20 = Forced Directed Retry

Internal and External Directed Retries are possible (since B6.2)

1 5 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 32

1 Handover Detection

Directed Retry

Directed Retry
Set on a per cell basis with parameter EN_DR Same behavior as TCH HO Intercell handover causes are checked (i.e. all HO causes except 10, 11 and 13 (concentric cells) and causes 15 and 16 (intracell HO)) Candidate cell evaluation process: same as for TCH HO

1 5 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 33

1 Handover Detection

Forced Directed Retry: Cause 20

CAUSE 20: Forced Directed Retry

AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) And EN_FORCED_DR = ENABLE

EN_FORCED_DR value is only relevant if EN_DR = true AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is calculated with A_PBGT_DR window if less than A_PBGT_DR samples are available, the average value is calculated with the available samples and the averaging window is filled in with -110 dBm

1 5 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 34

1 Handover Detection

Forced Directed Retry: Cell Candidate Evaluation

Pre-ranking
using PREF_LAYER, PRIORITY(0,n), frequency band

Filtering process
AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > RXLEVmin(n) +max(0,MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - P)

Number of free TCHs t(n) > FREElevel_DR(n)

Remaining cells are sorted according totheir PBGT_DR(n) (averaging window A_PBGT_DR)
PBGT_DR(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_DR - (BS_TXPWR_MAX - BS_TXPWR) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - MS_TXPWR_MAX)

1 5 35
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 35

1 Handover Detection

Forced Directed Retry: Parameters

L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n): level required in the neighbor cell n


The parameter considered is the one set in the neighbor cell The default value depends on network architecture See next slide

Freelevel_DR(n): number of free TCH channels required in the neighbor cell n


The parameter considered is the one set in the neighbor cell Default value = 0 to 4 TCHs (linked to the nb of TRXs)

A_PBGT_DR: Averaging window


Default value = 4 SACCHs

1 5 36
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 36

1 Handover Detection

Cause 24: General Capture

CAUSE 24: general capture


Capture handover
Modified in B8: Inhibition of capture handovers for Single layer serving cell

S e rvi n g c e l l

C ell C ell C ell

May be triggered

From all cells C ell Towards all cells except serving Can be used to capture traffic by any cell, whatever its type, band, etc.

1 5 37
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 37

1 Handover Detection

Cause 24: General Capture [cont.]

CAUSE 24: general capture


AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) > L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n) + max (0, [MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) - P]) Traffic_load(0) = CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION Traffic_load(n) HIGH EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO = ENABLE

and and and

Size of window for averaging level: A_PBGT_HO CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION can take 3 values: ANY_LOAD (default), HIGH, NOT_LOW Anti ping-pong: not checked if T_INHIBIT_CPT is running

1 5 38
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Case the serving cell is in the upper or single layer (CELL_LAYER_TYPE(n0) = upper or single):

Condition 1:

The immediately preceding cell n-1 is in the indoor or lower layer, i.e. CELL_LAYER_TYPE(n1) = lower or indoor, or the frequency band of the immediately preceding cell n-1 is different from the frequency band of the serving cell n0, i.e. CELL_BAND_TYPE(n1) <> CELL_BAND_TYPE(n0).

Condition 2:

The call has previously performed i) an emergency internal handover on quality (Cause 2, 4, and 7) towards the serving cell or ii) an external handover with the A interface GSM cause uplink quality or downlink quality and there is a bi-directional adjacency link between the preceding external cell n-1and the serving cell n0. If Conditions 1 and 2 are fulfilled the timer T_INHIBIT_CPT is started

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 38

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO

CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic HO


Push out of a cell a mobile in dedicated mode to allow a queued request to be served in the serving cell
Complement the current traffic HO (Cause 23), for sudden traffic peaks (no averaging window used) More efficient where the overlap of adjacent cells is reduced
Ne
all attempt wc

Most appropriate MS to be pushed out HO

C o n g es t e d S e r v i n g ce l l

N eigh bo r c ell

C el l

ew

call attempt

Most appropriate MS to be pushed out

HO

Upper layer cell

C o n g es t e d Serving cell
1 5 39
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

N eigh bo r c ell

C el l

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

AV_RXLEV_NCELL( n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR( n) + max(0,[MS_TXPWR_MAX( n)-P])

The threshold L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is the observed level from the neighbor cell n at the border of the area where fast traffic handovers are enabled. This threshold fixes the size of the overlapping area where fast traffic handovers can be performed. It should be greater than RXLEVmin(n). FREElevel_DR(n) is the minimum threshold of free TCHs in the neighbor cell n for forced directed retry and fast traffic handover. t(n) is the absolute number of free (dual rate) TCHs in the neighbor cell n. For external cells, t( n) is fixed to the arbitrary value t(n) = 255. Therefore, setting FREElevel_DR(n) to 255 for an external cell inhibits outgoing external fast traffic handover towards this cell. Setting FREElevel_DR(n) to any other value will allow outgoing external fast traffic handover towards this cell. The flag EN_CAUSE_28 is not an OMC flag but a HOP flag.

And t(n) > FREElevel_DR(n)

EN_CAUSE_28 = enable

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 39

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO [cont.]

B11

CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic Handover


Cause 28 is only checked if the channel of the candidate MS can support the channel rate (HR or FR) required by the queued request:

Queued Request HR FR

Candidate MS HR , or FR on dual rate TRX FR (Whatever the TRX type)

HO is triggered when a request is queued at the top of the queue


Modified B11

If the MS is E-GSM capable then the G1 TRXs of the target cells are also considered
1 5 40
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 40

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO [cont.]

CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic Handover equation


AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) + max(0,[MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)-P]) t(n) > FREElevel_DR(n) EN_CAUSE_28 = ENABLE EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = ENABLE

AND AND AND

Size of window for averaging level: A_PBGT_DR Same thresholds and window as Cause 20 (Forced Directed Retry) EN_CAUSE_28 is an internal HOP process variable

1 5 41
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 41

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 28: Fast Traffic HO [cont.]

B11

CAUSE 28: Fast Traffic Handover process


Resource Allocation Management

Modified B11
Fast Traffic HO Request - Queued request reference - Channel rate of queued request - Channel band of the queued request

Handover Preparation

Handover Management

Assignment request queued

EN_CAUSE_28=enable HO alarm: cause 28? Yes

No

Fast Traffic HO Acknowledge - Queued request reference - Reference of MS can perform HO

EN_CAUSE_28=disable

Yes NO END DHCP Request still queued?

Start HO - Cause number 28 - Reference of the call to handover (which corresponds to the first candidate MS received)

Check first 2 conditions of cause 28 OK NOK END DHCP T_FILTER is started

1 5 42
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

HO cause 28 process:
If EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = enable, when an assignment request (or external emergency HO request) is queued, the RAM process sends to the HOP process a Fast Traffic HO request which contains the queued request reference and its channel rate.

Then, HO cause 28 becomes checkable (EN_CAUSE_28=enable).

Once an HO alarm for cause 28 is triggered, the flag EN_CAUSE_28 is set to disable so as not to perform more than one handover. In the same time, the HOP process gets back to the RAM process a Fast Traffic HO Acknowledge which contains the queued request reference and the reference of the MS that can perform HO. If several answers are sent to the RAM process, only the first one corresponding to the queued request is taken into account. The RAM process checks if the request is still queued. If that is so, the RAM process asks the HOP process to start HO for this mobile; otherwise the process is stopped.

Once the HOP process receives this message, the first two conditions of Cause 28 (good enough level, enough free resources in the target cell) are checked one more time. If the conditions are fulfilled, the HOP process sends an alarm to the HOM entity and the timer T_FILTER is started ; otherwise the process is stopped.

Note: the first two conditions of cause 28 are tested twice in order to be sure that the candidate cells are still valid when the cause 28 start HO message is received from the RAM process.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 42

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 15: UL Interference

CAUSE 15: High interference on the uplink


Intracell HO AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO > THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH AND AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_IH AND EN_CAUSE_15 = ENABLE AND [ no previous intracell handover for this connection failed OR EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = ENABLE ] Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO

1 5 43
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 and EN_CAUSE_15 are not parameters but variables defined just after. In B7:

New causes (26 & 27) introduced due to AMR support


Cause 26 is an emergency condition: Intracell HO: speech codec from AMR-HR to AMR-FR Cause 27 is a better condition Intracell HO: speech codec from AMR-FR to AMR-HR Specific enablers and thresholds for AMR calls AMR emergency HO (cause 26) is triggered if cause 15 or 16 has already been triggered Codec sharing and optimization for MTM calls

Causes 15 & 16 are modified due to AMR support


Cause 29 is created for intracell handover due to TFO

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 43

1 Handover Detection

Handover Cause 16: DL Interference

CAUSE 16: High interference on the downlink


Intracell HO AV_RXQUAL_DL_HO > THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_16 + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH AND AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_IH AND EN_CAUSE_16 = ENABLE AND [ no previous intracell handover for this connection failed OR EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = ENABLE ] Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_HO Size of window for averaging level: A_LEV_HO

1 5 44
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_16 and EN_CAUSE_16 are not parameters but variables defined after.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 44

1 Handover Detection

New Parameters for Causes 15 & 16

CAUSE 15 and CAUSE 16:


THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 (or 16) and EN_CAUSE_15 (or 16) are specific to HOP
THR_RXQUAL_CAUSE_15 (or 16) = L_RXQUAL_XX_H for a non AMR call (same threshold as CAUSE 2 or CAUSE 4) L_RXQUAL_XX_H_AMR for an AMR call

EN_ CAUSE _15 (or 16) =


EN_INTRA_XX for a non AMR call EN_INTRA_XX_AMR for an AMR call

1 5 45
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

XX = UL or DL For a non-AMR call, the thresholds used are identical to the ones used for CAUSE 2 and CAUSE 4. In this case and if EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED = DISABLE, when aN HO CAUSE 15 (or 16) fails, it can be modified as UPLINK (or DOWLINK) QUALITY, HO CAUSE 2 (respectively HO CAUSE 4).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 45

1 Handover Detection

GSM Standard Codecs

Principles:
Two consecutive encodings: speech coding and channel coding With current codecs, the share of each coding is FIXED (not optimized)

FI XED

Channel coding
Speech protection "against degradation" 22.8 Kbit/s (FR TS)

Speech coding
Speech information "useful part" 13 Kbit/s (FR) ou 12.2 Kbit/s (EFR)

Voice Radio Channel coding Speech coding


Speech information "useful part" 5.6 Kbit/s (HR) Speech protection "against degradation" 11.4 Kbit/s (HR TS)

Voice

Radio
1 5 46
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Speech coding contains speech information (the useful part). Channel coding protects speech information (against radio degradations). The main speech codec currently used in GSM networks, speech Full Rate, is quite old. It has been specified more than 10 years ago. Around 1992, to increase network capacity, GSM has specified a half rate speech codec. But this codec showed strong limitations in terms of speech quality, especially for mobile to mobile calls (double transcoding degrades very much the speech quality of the half rate codec) and under poor radio conditions. Recently, studies on AMR have been launched to provide a solution to:

Increase speech quality in full rate and half rate, Increase network capacity by offering a good half rate solution, Use a long-term solution, to avoid adding more and more codecs handled independently from the others.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 46

1 Handover Detection

Adaptative Multi-Rate

HR AMR (NarrowBand):

Speech frame (20 ms) Speech coding


N bits

FR AMR (NarrowBand):
95 4.75 kbit/s 103 5.15 kbit/s 118 5.9 kbit/s N= 134 6.7 kbit/s 148 7.4 kbit/s 159 7.95 kbit/s 204 10.2 kbit/s 244 12.2 kbit/s N= N=

95 4.75 kbit/s 103 5.15 kbit/s 118 5.9 kbit/s 134 6.7 kbit/s 148 7.4 kbit/s 159 7.95 kbit/s

Channel coding
456 (FR) or 228 (HR) bits

FR AMR WideBand:
132 6.6 kbit/s 177 8.85 kbit/s 253 12.65 kbit/s

1 5 47
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In order to adapt the intermediate rate, a set of speech codecs has been defined by ETSI to be used by AMR:

When radio conditions are good, increases speech information. When radio conditions are bad, protects speech information.

Full Rate AMR-NB: Alcatel-Lucent implementation is fully compliant with GSM recommendations. All these AMR FR codec modes are supported. In particular, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS has implemented the 7.95, 5.9 and 4.75 codec modes which use polynomials of constraint length 7 to ensure a high protection. Half Rate AMR-NB: Alcatel-Lucent implementation supports 5 out of 6 AMR HR codec modes (AMR HR 7.95 is not supported) which are fully compliant with GSM recommendations. In particular, the Alcatel-Lucent BSS has implemented the 4.75 codec mode which uses polynomials of constraint length 7 to ensure a high protection. AMR-WB: Defined in 3GPP Release 5, its described in 3GPP TS 26.171 as follow:

OFR AMR-WB : known as FR sv4 [Not supported in ALU BSS B10]

Uses a FR channel with 8-PSK 5 codec modes are defined : 23.85 kbit/s, 15.85 kbit/s, 12.65 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, 6.60 kbit/s Uses a FR channel with GMSK 3 codec modes are defined : 12.65 kbit/s, 8.85 kbit/s, 6.60 kbit/s Uses a HR channel with 8-PSK Same codec modes as FR AMR-WB

FR AMR-WB : known as FR sv5

OHR AMR-WB : known as HR sv4 [Not supported in ALU BSS B10]

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 47

1 Handover Detection

Adaptative Multi-Rate: [Cont.]

The main difference between AMR WideBand (AMR-WB) and AMR-NB is the sampling rate.
AMR-NB Sampling rate: 8 kHz AMR-WB Sampling rate: 16 kHz

SF (20 ms)

Speech Coding N bits bit rate R

Channel Coding

456 (FR) or 228 (HR) bits

In 2G, AMR-WB allows to improve voice quality and enables 3G service continuity. The AMR-WB feature is used with the new MT-120WB transcoder board. TFO is a prerequisite for AMR-WB. Indeed, without TFO, all benefits from WB speech coding are lost because of transcoding from AMR-WB to AMR-NB.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 5 48
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

For AMR-NB, during a call, only a subset out of the 8 codecs (in case of FR) or 6 codecs (in case of HR) is used. The Active Codec Set (ACS) can include from 1 to 4 codecs. It is up to the operator to define its own codec subset with the following O&M parameters: AMR_FR_SUBSET and AMR_HR_SUBSET. The ACS will be relevant only if FR AMR-NB is activated: EN_AMR_FR = Enable (resp HR AMR-NB is activated: EN_AMR_HR = Enable) In particular, he can define a codec subset limited to the common codec modes supported by all the BSSs of its network (some BSSs may not be able to support all of them due to implementability problems). The codec subset defined by the operator is the same in the uplink and in the downlink. For AMR-WB, there is no need to define an ACS. Only the flag EN_AMR-WB_GMSK to be set to Enable Codec Mode Adaptation:

dynamic change from one codec to another, using the same channel (FR or HR). metric used: C/I (Carrier over interference ratio). change from one FR channel to an HR one and vice-versa independently from the codec mode. metric used: RX_QUAL uplink and downlink.

Channel Mode adaptation:


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 48

1 Handover Detection

Codec Mode Adaptation


Based on adaptive trade-off between the share of throughput given to speech coding and the one given to channel coding (speech protection) Depends on radio conditions estimated in real-time

Bad radio conditions

Medium radio conditions

Good radio conditions

Speech coding = speech information Channel coding = speech protection

1 5 49
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The AMR principle is to have a set of codecs and, for any radio conditions, to use the one with the best speech quality.

Under good radio conditions, a codec with a high bit rate is used. Speech is encoded with more information so the quality is better. In the channel coding, only little place is left for redundancy. Under poor radio conditions, a codec with a low bit rate is chosen. Speech is encoded with less information, but this information can be well protected due to redundancy in the channel coding. The BSS adapts dynamically the codec in uplink direction and in downlink direction, taking into account the C/I measured by the BTS (for uplink adaptation) and by the MS (for downlink adaptation). The codec used in the uplink and used in the downlink can be different: the adaptation is independent in each direction. This permits to use an optimal codec for each C/I value of each direction, as indicated in the figure below.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 49

1 Handover Detection

Codec Mode Adaptation [Cont.]


For AMR-NB, only a subset of 4 codecs can be used per channel type (FR/HR) The same codec subset is used for Uplink and Downlink For both AMR (NB and WB), codec mode adaptation is performed as follow:
In Uplink, for each SACCH frame, the BTS compares C/I value to the threshold corresponding to the current codec (belonging to the codec subset defined by the operator) In downlink, its the same process as uplink adaptation. Nevertheless, the BTS remains the master

Unrelated processes uplink and downlink codecs may be different at a given time

1 5 50
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 50

1 Handover Detection

Codec Mode Adaptation: AMR-NB


The Codec mode can be modified on one frame out of two (CMI / CMCCMR). Decision based on thresholds (OMC-R settable), for the uplink and the downlink. C/I norm
High CODEC_MODE_4 (less robust)

AMR_FR_THR_3 + AMR_FR_HYST AMR_FR_THR_3

CODEC_MODE_3
AMR_FR_THR_2 + AMR_FR_HYST AMR_FR_THR_2

CODEC_MODE_2
AMR_FR_THR_1 + AMR_FR_HYST AMR_FR_THR_1

Low
1 5 51
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

CODEC_MODE_1 (most robust)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 51

1 Handover Detection

Codec Mode Adaptation: AMR-WB


The Codec mode can be modified on one frame out of two (CMI / CMCCMR). Decision based on thresholds (OMC-R settable), for the uplink and the downlink.
C/I norm High CODEC_MODE_3 (less robust)
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 + AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

CODEC_MODE_2
AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 + AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1

Low

CODEC_MODE_1 (most robust)

1 5 52
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 52

1 Handover Detection

Codec Mode Adaptation

Uplink adaptation
MS BTS C/I evaluation & thresholds comparison Codec Mode Command (new codec mode) Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode) Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode) TC

Downlink adaptation
MS C/I evaluation & thresholds comparison Codec Mode Request (new codec mode) Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode) Codec Mode Request (new codec mode) Codec Mode Indication (new codec mode) BTS TC

1 5 53
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 53

1 Handover Detection

AMR-NB Channel Mode Adaptation

The choice between HR AMR-NB and FR AMR-NB is called: Channel mode adaptation Its done at call setup and during the call through HO causes 26 & 27

1 5 54
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 54

1 Handover Detection

AMR Gain

AMR: always gives end user the best satisfaction


Comparison between different codecs in terms of capacity and quality:
Speech quality requirement FR EFR HR FR AMR-NB HR AMR-NB FR AMR-NB + HR AMR-NB FR AMR-WB without TFO FR AMR-WB with TFO Capacity requirement

1 5 55
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The main speech codec currently used in GSM networks, speech Full Rate, is quite old. It has been specified more than 10 years ago. Around 1992, to increase network capacity, GSM has specified a half-rate speech codec. But this codec showed strong limitations in terms of speech quality, especially for mobile-to-mobile calls (double transcoding degrades very much the speech quality of the half-rate codec) and under poor radio conditions. A few years later, when GSM started to be introduced in North America, American operators asked for an improved speech codec for full rate channels. Indeed speech quality was a major argument for customers used to have a good speech quality with analog systems. For that issue, EFR was specified for GSM. Recently, studies on AMR have been launched to provide a solution to:

Increase speech quality in full rate and half rate, Increase network capacity by offering a good half rate solution, Use a long-term solution, to avoid adding more and more codecs handled independently from the others,

Take into account Tandem Free Operation (TFO), especially between MSs on half rate on one side and on full rate on the other side.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 55

1 Handover Detection

AMR: TCH Allocation

FR / HR discrimination
Cell load AV_LOAD() computed from
load samples = NB_BUSY_TS / NB_TS * 100 non sliding window (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) averaging process
AV_LOAD
100%

HR for any MS THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1=80% HR for AMR MS FR for other MS HR for AMR MS FR for other MS

THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3=60% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1=50% THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3=40% FR for any MS

FR for any MS Time


1 5 56
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Load samples are computed by the BSC every TCH_INFO_PERIOD = 5 seconds. LOAD_EV_PERIOD is the averaging window size for cell load computation. It is equal to 12 but can be changed at the OMC-R level on a per cell basis. Therefore cell load process has a periodicity of 1mn by default (TCH_INFO_PERIOD*LOAD_EV_PERIOD). The allocation of Half rate resources is decided upon the load evaluation in the serving cell. AMR HR (HR SV3) offers a better speech quality than HR SV1. The Alcatel-Lucent BSS offers thus the possibility to define a set of thresholds specific for AMR. If the load increases, AMR HR capable MSs can be the first to be allocated in HR (HR SV3) for load reasons, and if the load still increases, then all the HR capable MSs can be allocated in HR (HR SV1 & HR SV3) for load reasons. This is why two variables of load are defined: LOAD_SV3 and LOAD_SV1. Each load variable is calculated through its own threshold set: the thresholds related to the variable LOAD_SV3 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) are less restrictive than the ones related to the variable LOAD_SV1 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1). As a consequence, if the load of the cell increases, then the variable LOAD_SV3 will first equal TRUE, and if the load still increases, the variable LOAD_SV1 will then equal TRUE. The variable LOAD_SV1 corresponds to a level of load where it is important to put as many MSs on half rate TCH as possible: HR SV3 or HR SV1.
Previous state AV_LOAD AV_LOAD THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 < THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 AV_LOAD THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 < AV_LOAD THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = TRUE LOAD_SV1 = FALSE LOAD_SV1 = TRUE

LOAD_SV1 = TRUE

LOAD_SV1 = TRUE

The same computation is done to compute LOAD_SV3 with the thresholds: THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 and THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 with the following relations:

THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 56

1 Handover Detection

Cause 26: AMR HR to FR HO

CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)


Cause 26 is triggered if :
Current channel rate is HR Current channel is dual rate and changes are allowed AMR_FR speech codec is allowed:

EN_AMR_FR = ENABLE

1 5 57
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 57

1 Handover Detection

Cause 26: AMR HR to FR HO [cont.]


CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR) equation [ a previous intracell HO cause 15 or 16 has been triggered for this call in the serving cell
OR EN_INTRA_DL_AMR = DISABLE and EN_INTRA_UL_AMR = DISABLE] AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_HR_FR > THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_CA + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_IH AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_HR_FR > THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_CA + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_IH EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR = ENABLE AND OR AND

Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR

1 5 58
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

2 different flags in order to activate cause 26 and cause 27 separately. In B10, EN_AMR_CA has been removed and replaced by 2 parameters:

EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR

HO algorithms in the BSC is modified so that cause 26 and cause 27 are enabled separately. EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR: This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR channel adaptation (Handover Cause 26) (cell parameter)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 58

1 Handover Detection

Cause 26: AMR HR to FR HO [cont.]


CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
THR_RXQUAL_CA and OFFSET_CA are set as follows: if LOAD_SV3(0) = false then THR_RXQUAL_CA = THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL OFFSET_CA = OFFSET_CA_NORMAL if LOAD_SV3(0) = true then THR_RXQUAL_CA = THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH OFFSET_CA = OFFSET_CA_HIGH

1 5 59
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 59

1 Handover Detection

Cause 26: AMR HR to FR HO [cont.]


CAUSE 26: AMR channel adaptation HO (HR to FR)
Calculation of LOAD_SV3(0): If previous value of LOAD_SV3 = false then If AV_LOAD > THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 then LOAD_SV3 = true Else LOAD_SV3 = false Else (if previous value of LOAD_SV3 = true then) If AV_LOAD <= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 then LOAD_SV3 = false Else LOAD_SV3 = true

1 5 60
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

More details are provided in Annex.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 60

1 Handover Detection

Cause 27: AMR FR to HR HO


CAUSE 27: AMR channel adaptation HO (FR to HR) Cause 27 is triggered if:
Current channel rate is FR Current channel is dual rate and changes are allowed AMR_HR speech codec is allowed:

EN_AMR_HR = ENABLE

1 5 61
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 61

1 Handover Detection

Cause 27: AMR FR to HR HO [cont.]

CAUSE 27: AMR channel adaptation HO (FR to HR) equation


AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_FR_HR <= THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH

AND

AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_FR_HR <= THR_RXQUAL_CA + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH AND EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR = ENABLE


Size of window for averaging quality: A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR

1 5 62
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

2 different flags in order to activate cause 26 and cause 27 separately. In B10, EN_AMR_CA has been removed and replaced by 2 parameters:

EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR

HO algorithms in the BSC is modified so that cause 26 and cause 27 are enabled separately. EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR: This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR channel adaptation (Handover Cause 27) (cell parameter)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 62

1 Handover Detection

Cause 26 & 27 Interworking


Quality

Good quality: 0

Half Rate
HO cause 27 THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL + OFFSET_CA_NORMAL

Half Rate

HO cause 26

HO cause 27 THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH + OFFSET_CA_HIGH

HO cause 26

Full Rate
Bad quality: 7

Full Rate Load = True

Load = False

1 5 63
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 63

1 Handover Detection

Introduction to TFO

Tandem Free Operation (TFO) solution


Double Transcoding without TFO
Encoding MS A
Compressed Speech ITU-T G.711 A-Law/ ? -Law Compressed Speech

Decoding

Encoding Transcoding Function Decoding MS B

Transcoding Function

GSM Codec at 8 or 16 Kbit/s

PSTN Codec at 64 Kbit/s

GSM Codec at 8 or 16 Kbit/s

No Transcoding with TFO


TFO Encoding MS A
Compressed Speech

TFO Transcoding Function Decoding MS B

Transcoding Function

Compressed Speech

Compressed Speech

EFR, FR, HR, FR AMR-WB


1 5 64
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The Tandem Free Operation (TFO) feature is a way to avoid double transcoding in mobile to mobile speech calls. Indeed, without TFO one GSM codec type is used between the first mobile and the first transcoder, then the speech is transcoded into A/ law between transcoders and finally this speech is transcoded again into a second GSM codec type (which may be the same as the first one) between the second transcoder and the second mobile. With TFO, after call establishment, both BSSs at each side are able to negotiate a common GSM codec type which is then used from one mobile to the other mobile. This negotiation is performed through in-band signaling between transcoders.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 64

1 Handover Detection

Introduction to TFO [cont.]


Applicability: Only MS-to-MS speech calls TFO is based on information exchanged between transcoders

MS

BTS BSC TRAU MSC

IPE

IPE MSC TRAU BSC

BTS

MS

64 Kbit/s Speech Sample carrying: - TFO frames on the LSB containing: - compressed speech samples - control bits - TFO messages - original PCM speech samples on the MSB

1 5 65
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 65

1 Handover Detection

TFO Principles

In the case of first allocation (normal assignment at call setup, interBSS handover, intra-BSS handover where no TFO was previously ongoing):
New call setup Exchange of Codec capabilities

Yes Match

No Look for common codec

Yes Intracell HO Found

No

TFO mode ON

Normal operation

1 5 66
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 66

1 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO HO


CAUSE 29: TFO HO
Intracell HO used in case of codec mismatch between two MSs calling, in order to match their speech codec No radio measurements needed No priority and may be triggered at any time Conditions: HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = ENABLE AND EN_TFO_MATCH = ENABLE

1 5 67
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 67

1 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters


EN_TFO
enables/disables the feature, per cell

EN_TFO_MATCH
enables/disables resolution of codec mismatch, per cell

EN_TFO_OPT
enables/disables codec optimization, per cell

FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR
enables/disables the basic functions of TFO for GSM EFR, FR and HR codec types when the current codec is AMR FR or AMR HR

FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED
controls the establishment of TFO in HR when the cell is loaded

KEEP_CODEC_HO
indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec in case of internal intercell HO

1 5 68
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Codec Mismatch At call setup for a mobile-to-mobile speech call, when both BSSs do not use the same codec type, a codec mismatch occurs. If a common codec type can be found, either one or possibly both BSSs perform an intracell handover to use the common codec type found. Afterwards TFO can be started using this common codec type. Codec mismatch resolution is authorized in the BSC using an O&M flag: EN_TFO_MATCH. This flag is forwarded to the TC, via the BTS. Codec Optimization At call setup for a mobile-to-mobile speech call, it can occur that a first common codec type can be found but a better speech quality would be provided with another common codec type. Once both BSSs operate in Tandem Free, they exchange their complete codec capabilities, to try to find a better codec type than the current one. Codec optimization is authorized in the BSC using an O&M flag : EN_TFO_OPT. This flag is forwarded to the TC, via the BTS. Classification of Codec Types In all cases, TFO is considered better as any tandeming configuration. In TFO, EFR is considered as better than FR, considered as better than HR. Force TFO vs. AMR TFO + AMR is not supported in this implementation of TFO. In the normal operation, a call established with AMR will not initiate a TFO negotiation. The goal of the function Force TFO vs. AMR is to allow a call, established with AMR to initiate a TFO negotiation and, if possible, to change of codec type to FR, HR or EFR to establish TFO. In-Path Equipment (IPE) TFO can only be activated if TFO frames (at 8 or 16 Kbit/s) can be sent transparently through the public switching network. In-path equipments are equipments such as echo cancelers or A/ law converters that modify the 64 Kbit/s speech signal. Such equipment need to be deactivated for TFO calls.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 68

5 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]

B11

EN_TFO_OPT: enables/disables codec optimization, per cell


Allows new TFO negotiation on an on-going MTM call to find a better common codec For example, HR is used on both sides, but FR is possible too HO cause 29 will be triggered on both sides towards the best codec

EN_TFO_AMR_WB : enable, disable the use of TFO in case of AMR WideBand, per cell EN_TFO_AMR_NB : enable, disable the use of TFO in case of AMR NarrowBand, per cell

1 5 69
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 69

1 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]

FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR:
TFO AMR-NB not specified
Call setup in AMR is not followed by TFO negotiation FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR enables HO cause 29 after AMR call establishment towards the best TFO codec

MS A

MS B

C e ll c a p:
AMR-NB / HR / FR / EFR

C e ll c a p :

HR / FR / EFR

Disabled (ETSI implementation)

The MS A using AMR-NB, could use HR/EFR/FR The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR The MS A can only use HR/EFR/FR The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR

TFO not possible

Enable (Alcatel patent)


FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR

EFR + TFO

1 5 70
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 70

1 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]

FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED:
Gives control on load regulation precedence vs. TFO
3 values: TFO_HR_NOT_FORCED, TFO_HR_ONLY, TFO_HR_PREFERRED enable different behaviours in case of loaded cell

MS A

MS B

Loaded cell M S /c e ll c a p : H / E F R/ F R
Disabled (ETSI implementation) The MS A can use HR/EFR/FR The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR The MS A can only use HR The MS B can use HR/EFR/FR

Unloaded cell M S /c e ll c a p : H R /E F R/ F R
EFR + TFO

Enable (Alcatel patent)


FORCE_TFO_HR_ WHEN_LOADED

HR + TFO

1 5 71
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 71

1 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]

KEEP_CODEC_HO
keeps the same codec type in the new cell in case of internal intercell HO in order to avoid resolving a new mismatch codec situation Avoids double speech quality transition: TFO --> non-TFO --> TFO 3 possible behaviors:
TFO_CALLS_ONLY: codec is preferably kept in case of internal intercell HO for TFO calls only ALL_CALLS: codec is preferably kept in case of internal intercell HO for all calls (whatever the TFO state) FREE: the choice of the codec type is free and depends on the situation in the target cell

1 5 72
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 72

5 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]


B7, Only TFO for legacy codecs (EFR, FR & HR) is supported B10, TFO for AMR-WB No TFO for AMR-NB
Degraded Speech Quality due to 3 transcoding stages

B11

MSC server

MSC server

BSS 1 MS 1
AMR-NB AMR-NB TC G711 No TFO

BSS 2 MS 2 MG
G711 No TFO

IP 1 MG
G711 over IP G711oIP requires high bandwidth

TC AMR-NB 2

AMR-NB

1 5 73
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 73

5 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]

B11

EN_TFO_AMR_NB
B11, TFO for AMR-NB Avoid 3 trancoding stages

MSC server

MSC server

High transmission savings in NGN Better Speech Quality BSS 2 MS 2

BSS 1 MS 1
AMR-NB AMR-NB TC AMR-NB MG TFO

IP
AMR-NB TrFO AMR over IP Transcoding Functions Bypassed

MG AMR-NB TC AMR-NB 2
TFO

AMR-NB

1 5 74
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Transcoder Free Operation (TrFO) is a Core Network protocol, applicable to the NGN architecture. TrFO allows to transport speech in the Core Network using GERAN/UTRAN codecs over IP, rather than G.711. Advantages:

Gain in transmission bandwidth. Gain in speech quality if the same codec is used over the complete path.

Contrarily to TFO, TrFO is out-of-band, i.e. negotiation is not done in the User Plane (embedded in speech frames), but in the Control Plane, on a specific interface. The AMR +TFO feature improves the speech quality of mobile-to-mobile calls and TFO-TrFO interaction in the NGN core network. AMR-WB without TFO does not make sense.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 74

5 Handover Detection

Cause 29: TFO Parameters [cont.]


AMR Codec Adaptation with TFO

B11

The Codec mode adaptation is performed independently on each direction. But for one direction, the same codec mode is used from one MS to the other MS. Codec mode adaptation is always performed for the side having the worst radio conditions
MS1 BTS1 TRAU1 TRAU2 BTS2 MS2

TFO establishment with original codec

UL downgrading

The BTS detects a bad uplink quality CMC: new codec (lower rate)

DL downgrading

The MS1 uses immediately the new codec CMI: new codec CMI: new codec CMI: new codec

UL upgrading

CMI: new codec

CMI: new codec

DL upgrading
1 5 75
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

TFO establishment with new codec

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 75

1 Handover Detection

Cause 30: Move from PS to CS Zone

PS

PS

PS

PS

CS

PS

PS

CS

BCCH SDCCH

CS

TRX3
Non pre-emptable zone MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone PS traffic zone

TRX1
HO cause 30

If EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO = enable AND a CS call is inside both


The Non pre-emptable zone and The MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT_ZONE then

An intra cell HO cause 30 is triggered

1 5 76
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The enabling/disabling of Cause 30 is independent of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.

MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD consecutive PS capable timeslots that are preferred for PS allocation. In this zone, allocated TBFs cannot be pre-empted. If the value of MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD is not modified, this zone remains unchanged. Non pre-emptable PS zone: this zone is always inside the MAX_SPDCH_HIGH_LOAD zone. In this latter zone, we search for the rightest timeslot allocated to the MFS and used. Then, all timeslots situated at its left define this non pre-emptable PS zone. MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone: this zone corresponds to the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT consecutive PS capable timeslots that are preferred for PS allocation. PS traffic zone: this zone corresponds to the larger zone between the non pre-emptable PS zone and the MAX_SPDCH_LIMIT zone.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 76

1 Handover Detection

Handover Causes Priorities

HANDOVER PRIORITIES Emergency Handover Uplink Quality Downlink Quality Uplink Level Downlink Level Distance Too Low Level UL Inner Too Low Level DL Inner HR to FR Channel Adaptation Uplink Interference Downlink Interference Cause 2 Cause 4 Cause 3 Cause 5 Cause 6 Cause 10 Cause 11 Cause 26 intracell Cause 15 intracell Cause 16 intracell Better Condition Handover Capture Handover Power Budget Traffic Outer UL/DL Level FR to HR Channel Adaptation Forced Directed Retry Fast Traffic HO Cause 24 Cause 12 Cause 23 Cause 13 Cause 27 intracell Cause 20 Cause 28

1 5 77
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The causes 24, 12 and 23 have the same priority. Nevertheless, if a cell is a candidate for both causes, triggered at the same time, it is kept only for cause 12. Dealing with all available causes, we get the following list:

Emergency: 7 > 17 > 18 > 2 > 4 > 3 > 5 > 6 > 22 > 10 > 11 > 26 > 15 > 16 Better conditions: 21=14=24=12=23 > 13 > 27 > 20 > 28 29,30 and 31 has no priority (can be detected at any time)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 77

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 1

Emergency causes
What is the HO cause 2? Which is the flag to activate the HO cause 2?

Time allowed: 45 minutes

1 5 78
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 78

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 2

Emergency causes Complete the diagram below and fill in the chart with: L_RXQUAL_UL_H = 3 RXLEV_UL_IH = -70 dBm P=MS_TXPWR_MAX=33dBm
Quality

Nb of case AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO AV_RXLEV_UL_HO Current MS power HO cause 2: YES/NO?

1 4 -81 33

2 1 -79 33

3 3 -75 33

4 4 -70 33

5 4 -69 33

6 4 -72 29 (0.8 w)
Level

1 5 79
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 79

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 3

Better condition causes (simple case)


There are only 2W cells and 2W MS EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Disable No Ping-Pong margin HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dB NO DL PC, RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_LIMIT=-47dBm, The serving is not a concentric cell.

S e r vi n g c e l l

N c el l

Fill in the chart:


Nb of case AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO PBGT(n) HO cause 12: YES/NO? 1 -70 -80 2 -70 -70 3 -80 -75 4 -70 -75 5 -70 -79 6 -75 -96

1 5 80
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 80

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 4

Better condition causes (ping-pong case)


EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Disable Ping-Pong margin PING_PONG_HCP=15db T_HCP =15s HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dB S e r vi n g c e l l A_PBGT_HO = 8 SACCH A n to 0 HO has just been triggered, what happens after 4s?

?
N c el l

Nb of case AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO PBGT(n) HO cause 12: YES/NO? PBGT>HO margin PING_PONG_HCP=15 -> PBGT(n) HO cause 12:YES/NO?
1 5 81
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

1 -70 -80 10 YES

2 -70 -70 0 NO

3 -80 -75 -5 NO

4 -70 -75 5 NO

5 -70 -79 9 YES

6 -75 -96 21 YES

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 81

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 5

Handover Detection
Better condition causes (traffic case) EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n) =Enable No Ping-Pong margin HO_MARGIN(0,n) =5 dB DELTA_DEC_HO_margin =5dB DELTA_INC_HO_margin =5dB
S e r vi n g c e l l

HO

N c el l

1 5 82
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 82

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 6

Better condition causes (traffic case)


HO

Fill in the chart:


Nb of case AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO Traffic distribution PBGT(n) DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0, n) Cause 12 HO: YES/NO? Cause 23 HO: YES/NO? 1 -71 dBm

S e rvi n g c e l l
2 -71 dBm 3 -76 dBm 4

N c el l

-71 dBm

-80 dBm -80 dBm -80 dBm -80 dBm 0: traffic low0: traffic high 0: traffic high0: traffic low N: traffic high N: traffic lowN: traffic lowN: traffic low

1 5 83
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 83

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 7

Channel adaptation (cause 26 and cause 27)


Why is it recommended to have A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR? An operator may be willing to:
- Under normal load, use only HR calls for quality 0 - Under high load, use HR calls for qualities 0 to 3, with an hysteresis of 1

Find the thresholds and offsets for normal and high load: THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL = ? OFFSET_CA_NORMAL = ? THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH = ? OFFSET_CA_HIGH = ?

1 5 84
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 84

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 8

Channel adaptation (cause 26 and cause 27)


EN_INTRA_XX_AMR = Disable RXLEV_XX_IH = -110 dBm OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 0 A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR =4 and A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR = 2

Use the previous thresholds and fill in the chart:

UL_QUAL DL_QUAL LOAD_SV3 AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_HR_FR AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_HR_FR AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_FR_HR AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_FR_HR CHANNEL TYPE

0 0
False

1 0
False

2 1
False

3 1
False

3 1
True

1 0
True

1 0
True

0 2
True

0 4
True

1 3
True

FR

FR

FR

1 5 85
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 85

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 9

Capture HO (Cause 24 )
There are only 2W cells and 2W MS L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n) = -85dBm EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO = ENABLE

HO

Fill in the chart:


S e rvi n g c e l l
Nb of case AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION TRAFFIC_LOAD(0) TRAFFIC_LOAD(n) HO cause 24: YES/NO? 1 - 70 NOT_LOW HIGH HIGH 2 - 70 HIGH LOW LOW 3 - 80 ANY_LOAD INDEFINITE INDEFINITE 4 - 70 HIGH HIGH LOW 5 - 70 NOT_LOW LOW LOW

N c el l
6 - 85 HIGH HIGH LOW

1 5 86
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 86

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 10

Fast Traffic HO (cause 28) Find the appropriate candidate MS for this queued request:
Channel rate required: HR L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) = -85 dBm (whatever n) FREElevel_DR(n) = 1 (whatever n) Channel rate: MS1FR on Full rate TRX, MS2HR, MS3FR on Dual rate TRX t(n) for neighbor cells: t(1)=1, t(2)=2, t(3)=2 AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) in dBm:

Neighbors MS 1 MS 2 MS 3

1 - 82 dBM - 79 dBM - 90 dBM

2 - 85 dBM - 86 dBM - 82 dBM

3 - 78 dBM - 92 dBM - 89 dBM

1 5 87
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 87

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 11

TFO HO (cause 29): after call setup Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_NOT_FORCED

MS A

MS B

Loaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : E F R/ F R

After call setup After TFO negociation

TCH = TCH =

? ?

TCH = TCH =

? ?

1 5 88
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 88

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 12

TFO HO (cause 29): after call setup Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY

MS A

MS B

Loaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : E F R/ F R

After call setup After TFO negociation

TCH = TCH =

? ?

TCH = TCH =

? ?

1 5 89
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 89

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 13

TFO HO (cause 29): after call setup Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_PREFERRED

MS A

MS B

Loaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : E F R/ F R

After call setup After TFO negociation

TCH = TCH =

? ?

TCH = TCH =

? ?

1 5 90
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 90

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 14

TFO HO (cause 29): after call setup Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY

MS A

MS B

Loaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R /E F R/F R

After call setup After TFO negociation

TCH = TCH =

? ?

TCH = TCH =

? ?

1 5 91
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 91

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 15

TFO HO (cause 29): after handover Find the speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY 1. KEEP_CODEC_HO = TFO_CALLS_ONLY 2. KEEP_CODEC_HO = FREE
MS 2 Call setup + TFO negociation MS 2 HO

MS 1

HO

MS 2

Loaded cell M S /c e ll c a p : H R/ E FR/F R

?
TFO

Unloaded cell M S /c e ll c a p : H R/ E FR/F R

?
1 5 92
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

?
TFO

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 92

1 Handover Detection

Exercise 16

TFO HO (cause 29): after handover Find the speech version types of the following MS-to-MS call:
EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY KEEP_CODEC_HO = TFO_CALLS_ONLY 1. EN_TFO_OPT = disable 2. EN_TFO_OPT = enable
MS 1 MS 2 Call setup + TFO negociation

HO

MS 2 HO

MS 2

U nload d cell e M S /c e ll c a p : H R/ E FR/F R

?
TFO

Loaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R/ E FR /F R

?
1 5 93
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

?
TFO

Unloaded cell M S / c e ll c a p : H R / E F R/ F R

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 93

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

1 5 94
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 94

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Principles

Used to rank potential target cells:


Ranking based on radio characteristics Ranking based on operator preferences Ranking based on traffic intensity

1 5 95
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

The process is performed in the BSC.

Once a need for handover is detected, this process looks for possible target cells (except if it is an intracell handover or an interzone handover) and provides the BSC entity in charge of the HO decision and execution entity with a list of candidate cells and their respective HO cause.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 95

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Evaluation Process
Measurement result Measurement Preprocessing A_LEV_HO A_QUAL_HO A_PBGT_HO A_RANGE_HO Performed every SACCH

HO Detection Preprocess measurement Cause 2: uplink quality Cause 3: uplink level Cause 4: downlink quality Cause 5: downlink level Cause 6: distance Cause 12: power budget Performed every SACCH Max every SACCH

Raw cell list Cell 1: cause C2 Cell 2: cause C2 Cell 3: cause C2 Cell 4: cause C2 Cell 5: cause C2 Cell 6: cause C2 Cell 7: cause C2 Cell 8: cause C2 ... max 32 cells

HO Candidate Cells Evaluation


Pre-ranking Priority (0, n) = 0 Cell 2: cause C2 Cell 3: cause C2 Cell 4: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 1 Cell 1: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 2 Priority (0, n) = 3 Cell 5: cause C2 Cell 6: cause C2 Cell 7: cause C2 Cell 8: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 4 Priority (0, n) = 5 PBGT filtering HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n) Priority (0, n) = 0 Cell 2: cause C2 Cell 3: cause C2 Cell 4: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 1 Priority (0, n) = 2 Priority (0, n) = 3 Cell 6: cause C2 Cell 8: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 4 Priority (0, n) = 5 Cell evaluation process (Order or Grade) Grade Priority (0, n) = 0 Cell 4: cause C2 Cell 2: cause C2 Cell 3: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 1 Priority (0, n) = 2 Priority (0, n) = 3 Cell 6: cause C2 Cell 8: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 4 Priority (0, n) = 5 Order Priority (0, n) = 0 Cell 4: cause C2 Cell 3: cause C2 Cell 2: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 1 Priority (0, n) = 2 Priority (0, n) = 3 Cell 6: cause C2 Cell 8: cause C2 Priority (0, n) = 4 Priority (0, n) = 5

1 5 96
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The HO candidate evaluation process is run after all intercell handover alarms. In case of intracell handover alarm (HO causes 10, 11, 13, 15, 16), the candidate cell evaluation process is skipped: the target cell is the serving cell. The handover detection gives as indication the raw cell list (built from book-keeping list) and the preferred layer for the handover. In case of emergency handover alarms or cause 20 alarm, the cell evaluation will order the cells given in the raw list, putting in the first position the cells belonging to the preferred layer, having the highest priority (if EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING=ENABLE) and/or having the same frequency band type as the serving cell. In case of an intercell handover alarm, if the serving cell belongs to the raw cell list (emergency handover from the DCS 1800 inner zone of a multiband cell), this cell is put at the end of the candidate cell list with the MS zone indication OUTER. In case of better condition handover alarms (except cause 20), the cell evaluation will order the cells given in the raw list, putting in the first position the cells belonging to the preferred layer and having the highest priority (if EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING=ENABLE).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 96

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Pre-Ranking

Pre-ranking in hierarchical or multi-band networks:


For emergency handover and causes 20 and 28 only.
Cell_band_type = serving_cell Cell_layer_type = Pref_layer Priority(0,n) = 0 Cell_band_type = serving_cell Priority(0,n) = 1

List of candidate cells n

Priority(0,n) = 5

!
Cell_layer_type = Pref_layer Priority(0,n) = 0 Priority(0,n) = 1 Cell_band_type not applicable to comfort causes

Priority(0,n) = 5
1 5 97
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 97

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Pre-Ranking [cont.]

With priority(0,n) settings, the operator can, for each couple of cells:
tag the target cell with a defined priority (from 0 = max to 5 = min) this definition has an higher priority than usual order/grade ranking

Especially useful for multi band/hierarchical architectures:


a simple way to force a target cell whatever its RxLev level and PBGT nevertheless can be skipped over by filtering processes low interest for standard networks

Priority

P1

Ca

ndidate cell 1

RxLev: - 70 dBm PBGT: + 10 dB

S e r vi n g c e l l

P0

Ca
1 5 98
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

ndidate cell 2

RxLev: - 90 dBm PBGT: + 5 dB

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Cell Ordering according to Target Layer and Target Band In hierarchical or multiband environment, cells are characterized by the layer they belong to or/and the frequency band they use. The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account these characteristics in the candidate cell ordering. In hierarchical environment, the HO detection process can indicate a preferred layer where the handover must be directed to. If this indication is used, the candidate cell evaluation puts in the first places of the list, the candidate cells belonging to the preferred layer. They are followed by the cells of the other layer, providing they are also correct candidates. After this possible distinction, in each part of the list, the candidate cell evaluation sorts the candidate cells according to the parameter PRIORITY(0,n) (parameter on line changeable from the OMC-R). The cells having the highest priority are put in the first place of the list. They are followed by the cells having the lowest priorities. The PRIORITY(0,n) is only used when the flag EN_PRIORTY_ORDERING is set to enable. In case of emergency handover, for each category (preferred layer and other layer) and between cells having the same priority, the candidate cell evaluation sorts the candidate cells according to the frequency band they use: the cells which use the same frequency band as the serving cell are put first and they are followed by the cells which use the other frequency band. The cell evaluation function is then applied to the different candidate cell lists defined from the preferred layer indication, the PRIORITY(0,n) parameter and the frequency band of the serving cell (only in case of emergency handover).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 98

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

PBGT Filtering

Characteristics:
optional, flag EN_PBGT_FILTERING filter out cells from the target list inhibited for better cell handovers based on of cells power budget per couple was needed for multiband architecture PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) + OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER
HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_QUAL (0,n)for cause 2,4 HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_LEV (0,n) for cause 3,5 HO_MARGIN_XX (0,n) = HO_MARGIN_DIST (0,n) for cause 6 OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER is only applied when the MS is in the inner zone of a concentric or multi band cell The averaging window is A_PBGT_HO

1 5 99
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The filtering process allows to filter out cells from the target list before sending them to the ORDER or GRADE evaluation process. It can be enabled/disabled on-line on a per cell basis from the OMC-R with the flag EN_PBGT_FILTERING. The candidate cells are filtered on their power budget in relation to a handover margin threshold based on the handover cause. Note: the averaging window used for this process is A_PBGT_HO (even for emergency handovers, where a handover alarm could have been raised through A_LEV_HO or A_QUAL_HO samples)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 99

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Order Evaluation

ORDER cell evaluation process


Cell "n" is ranked among other accordingly: If EN_LOAD_ORDER = ENABLE and cell n is internal to the BSC ORDER (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) + FREEfactor(n) - FREEfactor(0)- HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)
Link_factor (0,n) is an operator parameter to give a bonus/penalty to a cell ex: avoid external HO, decrease incoming flow of HO to a cell from another FREEfactor is TCH traffic based bonus/penalty to rank cells

If

EN_LOAD_ORDER = DISABLE or cell n is external to the BSC ORDER (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) - HO_MARGIN_XX(0,n)

Cell "n" is kept if: AV_RXLEV_NCELL (n) > RXLEVmin (n) + max [0;(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)-P)] [dBm]

1 5 100
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Two types of cell evaluation algorithms can be used: ORDER and GRADE. ORDER and GRADE are two different methods of cell ranking. They both consist in giving a mark or figure of merit to each candidate cell. The basic differences between ORDER and GRADE are that:

with ORDER:

The candidate cell evaluation process interacts with the handover detection by use of cause-dependent handover margins. The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account the number of free TCHs in the candidate cells. The candidate cell evaluation process does not interact with the handover detection. The candidate cell evaluation process takes into account the relative load of traffic channels in the candidate cells.

with GRADE:

The type of cell evaluation is chosen by the operator on a (serving) cell basis and is provided to the BSC with the parameter CELL_EV. For any handover cause, the first cell in the list is taken as a target cell, i.e. the cell with the highest value of ORDER(n). The cells do not need to fulfill any other condition. If no cell fulfills the condition and the serving cell does not belong to the target cell list, the target cell list is empty and no further action is carried out. Note: the A_PBGT_HO averaging window is used for this process.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 100

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

GRADE Evaluation

GRADE cell evaluation process

Cell "n" is ranked among other accordingly: If EN_LOAD_ORDER = ENABLE and cell n is internal to the BSC GRADE (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n) + LOADfactor(n)
Link_factor (0,n) is an operator parameter to give a bonus/penalty to a cell LOADfactor(n) is a weighting factor that takes into account the relative load of traffic channels in a cell

If

EN_LOAD_ORDER = DISABLE or cell n is external to the BSC GRADE (n) = PBGT(n) + LINK_FACTOR(0,n)

Cell "n" is kept if: AV_RXLEV_NCELL (n) > RXLEVmin(n) + max [0;(MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)-P)]

1 5 101
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

LINKfactor(0,n) is a parameter set by OMC command for each cell(n). LINKfactor(n1,n2) allows the operator to handicap or to favor the cell n1 with respect to its neighbor cell n2. In particular, it can be used to disadvantage an external cell when an internal cell is also a possible candidate. For any handover cause, the first cell in the list is taken as a target cell, i.e. the cell with the highest value of GRADE(n). If no cell fulfills the condition and the serving cell does not belong to the target cell list, the target cell list is empty and no further action is carried out. Note: the A_PBGT_HO averaging window is used for this process. More details are provided in Annex.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 101

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Exercise 1

Emergency HO detected
With the Candidate evaluation.xls excel sheet...
Filtering simulation for a list of candidate cells Ranking simulation for a list ofcandidate cells
Candidate Cell Evaluation
HO Cause A_PBGT_HO GRADE EVALUATION Priority(0,n) HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n) RX_LEV_MIN(n) LINK_FACTOR(0,n) LoadFactor(n) Serving cell Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 Cell 4 Cell 5 DL Level 6 0 for all neighbor cell 0 -100 0 for all neighbor cell 0 Cell 6

M k
** ** ** AssC md AssC mp ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** ** HO C M D

Time allowed: 15 minutes

R x L e v _D L C e ll_N b 1B S IC _c e ll1 R x L e v _c e ll1 C e ll_N b 2 B S IC _c e ll2R x L e v _c e ll2 C e ll_N b 3B S IC _c e ll3R x L e v _c e ll3 C e ll_N b 4B S IC _c e ll4R x L e v _c e ll4 C e ll_N b 5 B S IC _c e ll5R x L e v _c e ll5 C e ll_N b 6B S IC _c e ll6R x L e v _c e ll6 -102 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -99 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -99 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -98 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -76 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -96 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -95 14 3 -91 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -93 14 3 -92 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -93 1 0 -89 14 3 -91 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -93 1 0 -90 14 3 -94 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -93 1 -0 -88 14 3 -94 3 1 -101 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -94 8 7 -93 1 0 -93 14 3 -96 3 1 -103 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -96 1 0 -93 8 7 -95 14 3 -99 3 1 -106 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -96 -1 0 -91 8 7 -95 14 3 -99 3 1 -104 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -98 1 0 -92 14 3 -98 8 7 -99 3 1 -107 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -101 8 7 -97 1 0 -97 14 3 -102 3 1 -107 0 0 -110 0 0 -110 -101 8 7 -96 1 0 -99 14 3 -103 3 1 -108 0 0 -110 0 0 -110

1 5 102
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 102

2 Handover Candidate Cell Evaluation

Exercise

Emergency HO detected
1
Book-keeping list Book-keeping list (14;3) (1;0) (8;7) (3;1) (1;0)

PBGT Filtering PBGT Filtering PBGT(n) (8;7)

Averaging measurement Averaged measurements and PBGT(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO (14;3) (1;0) (8;7) (3;1) -100 -95 -96 PBGT(n) -2

3 2

GRADE evaluation process GRADE evaluation process GRADE(n) (1;0) (8;7)

?
3 2 -8

-106

3 2

Target Cell

?
1 5 103
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

(1;0)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 103

3 Exercise

1 5 104
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 104

3 Exercise

Exercise

List all the parameters involved in the detection of cause 23 List all the causes impacted by the parameter DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN List all the causes impacted by the parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_H List all the causes impacted by the parameter BS_TXPWR_MAX List all the causes impacted by the parameter BS_P_CON_ACK

Time allowed: 10 minutes

1 5 105
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 105

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 5 106
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 106

End of Module Handover Algorithms

1 5 107
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Handover Algorithms GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12205AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 5 Page 107

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 6 Resources Allocation Management
3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 1

Blank Page

162
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe TCH resource allocation List the associated parameters

163
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

164
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm Page 7

165
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

166
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 6

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

167
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 7

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Radio Allocation and Management

Radio resource Allocation and Management (RAM) aims at:


Managing pools of TCH radio resources by:
defining TCH radio timeslots as a function of the cell radio configuration from the operator sorting these TCH TSs according to their radio capabilities (FR or DR, frequency band (G1 or GSM/DCS))

Allocating dedicated TCH radio resources by:


selecting the TCH pool in which the TCH should be chosen according to:

the requested channel rate (FR or HR) the radio capability of the mobile the TRE DR capability and the TRE band

selecting the best TCH resource among the available TCH channels of this pool according to several criteria

168
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 8

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Radio Timeslot of a Cell: Operator View

On the OMC-R the operator can configure the following Radio TS per cell:
Main BCCH timeslot (BCC): TS carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH Main combined BCCH timeslot (CBC): TS carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 + SACCH/4 Main combined BCCH with CBCH (CBH) : TS carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/3 + SACCH/3 + CBCH Secondary BCCH timeslot (CCH) : TS carrying BCCH + CCCH Static SDCCH timeslot (SDC): TS carrying SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8 Static SDCCH timeslot combined with CBCH (SDH): TS carrying SDCCH/7 + SACCH/7 + CBCH Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (SDD): TS carrying TCH + SACCH or SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8 TCH timeslot (TCH): TS carrying TCH + SACCH or used as a PS timeslot (PDCH)

169
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The operator has to choose between a Combined BCCH (CBC TS) or a Non-combined BCCH configuration (BCC TS). A PDCH is a radio timeslot used for PS traffic or signaling. It can carry either PS traffic or PS signaling but not both.
If it carries traffic it is called a Slave PDCH (SPDCH) TS and it carries the logical channels PDTCH+PACCH+PTTCH.

If it carries signaling it is called a Master PDCH (MPDCH) TS and it carries:


either the logical channels PBCCH+PPCH+PAGCH+PRACH: it is then called a Primary MPDCH or only PPCH+PAGCH+PRACH: it is then called a Secondary MPDCH

SDD TS can carry either TCH or SDCCH channels but not both at the same time. TCH TS can carry either CS traffic channel TCH or PS logical channels but not both at the same time.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 9

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Radio Timeslot of a Cell: RAM View

In the BSS the RAM software module maps the OMC-R cell radio configuration to its own types of TS:
Pure BCCH timeslot: BCC TS carrying only common CS signalling (BCCH+CCCH) Pure SDCCH timeslot: CBC or SDC TS carrying only dedicated CS signalling (SDCCH) Pure TCH timeslot: TCH TS carrying only TCH traffic TCH/SDCCH timeslot: SDD TS carrying either CS traffic (TCH) or dedicated CS signalling (SDCCH) TCH/SPDCH timeslot: TCH TS carrying either CS traffic (TCH) or PS traffic (SPDCH channels) MPDCH timeslot: TCH TS carrying common PS signalling (PBCCH+PCCCH or PCCCH only)

1 6 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 10

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Radio Timeslot: OMC-R / RAM Mapping

NB_TS_MPDCH MPDCH TS are defined on the BCCH TRX:


on the timeslots configured as TCH TS on the OMC-R having the lowest timeslot index
OMC-R radio TS BCC CCH CBC SDC SDD

Pure BCCH Pure SDCCH TCH/SDCCH TCH/SPDCH

RAM radio TS

TCHC

MPDCH Pure TCH

TCH/SPDCH TS are defined as being part of an SPDCH group Pure TCH timeslots are OMC-R TCH TS neither defined as MPDCH TS nor in an SPDCH group
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 6 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MPDCH TS are defined on the BCCH TRX even if the corresponding TRX_PREF_MARK is different from 0.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 11

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Definition of a TCH/SPDCH TS

For PS traffic resource allocation, an SPDCH group is defined on a per TRX basis and is made up of consecutive timeslots:
mapped on OMC-R TCH TS located on a PS capable TRX (TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) not defined as MPDCH TS having the same radio configuration (MA, MAIO)

If several SPDCH groups can be defined on a given TRX, the BSS chooses the SPDCH group of timeslots having the highest number of consecutive timeslots. A radio timeslot belonging to one of the different SPDCH groups of the cell is identified in RAM as a TCH/SPDCH timeslot.

1 6 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The timeslots shall be consecutive on a given TRX, which means that there shall be no hole in the SPDCH group. If several SPDCH groups can be defined on the same TRX and having the same number of consecutive timeslots then the group that is located on the left side of the TRX (i.e. the timeslots having the lowest index) shall be chosen.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 12

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Definition of a TCH/SPDCH TS [cont.]

A non-hopping cell is configured on the OMC-R


0 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 BCC SDD TCH TCH 1 TCH TCH TCH TCH 2 SDC SDC TCH TCH 3 TCH TCH TCH TCH 4 TCH TCH TCH TCH 5 TCH TCH TCH TCH 6 TCH TCH TCH TCH 7 TCH TCH TCH TCH

TRX_PREF_MARK 0 0 0 1

Find the radio TS configuration in RAM if NB_TS_MPDCH= 0


0 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

MPD : MPDCH PBC : Pure BCCH PSD : Pure SDCCH PTC : Pure TCH TSD : TCH/SDCCH TSP : TCH/SPDCH

1 6 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The timeslots shall be consecutive on a given TRX, which means that there shall be no hole in the SPDCH group. If several SPDCH groups can be defined on the same TRX and having the same number of consecutive timeslots then the group that is located on the left side of the TRX (i.e. the timeslots having the lowest index) shall be chosen.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 13

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Pools

3 pools of TCH resources are managed per cell:


G1 pure TCH pool: contains all the free TCH sub-channels (FR or HR) free on the pure TCH TS of the G1 TRXs GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool: contains all the free TCH sub-channels (FR or HR) free on the pure TCH TS and on the TCH/SPDCH TS of the GSM/DCS TRXs GSM/DCS TCH/SDCCH pool: contains all the free TCH sub-channels (FR or HR) free on the TCH/SDCCH TS of the GSM/DCS TRXs

Any pure TCH, TCH/SPDCH, TCH/SDCCH TS can be:


Busy: if it is not free to serve an FR TCH request Free: if it is free to serve an FR TCH request

1 6 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

A DR TS (timeslot on a DR TRX) is free if no FR TCH or HR TCH is allocated for a call on this timeslot. A DR TS is busy if at least one TCH is allocated for a call on this timeslot:

1 FR TCH, or 1 HR TCH (HR 0 TCH or HR 1 TCH), or 2 HR TCHs (HR 0 TCH and HR 1 TCH).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 14

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Sub-Pools

FR TCH channels can be allocated on both FR and DR TRXs whereas HR TCH channels can only be allocated on DR TRXs Each of the three TCH pools is divided in three sub-pools:
FR sub-pool: contains all the free FR TCH sub-channels available on the FR TRX DR: sub-pool: contains all the free FR TCH sub-channels available on the DR TRX HR sub-pool: contains all the free HR TCH sub-channels whose mate HR TCH sub-channel is busy (always located on the DR TRX)

1 6 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 15

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Allocation Process

TCH Request - Radio capability of the mobile - Channel type (FR, HR, DR) - Speech version (FR, HR, EFR, AMR FR, AMR HR) - Request type (NA or HO) TCH Allocation

- Cell channel type capability - Cell codec type capability - Cell load

Yes TCH free? Select a TCH sub-pool Select a TCH in this sub-pool TCH selected Yes

No

Queuing?

No TCH rejected

TCH queued

1 6 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Inputs for TCH allocation function:

radio capability of the MS: The BSS knows the radio capability of the mobile from the MS CLASSMARK after the Radio Link Establishment procedure requirements from the MSC: Channel type (mandatory) is one of the following:
FR HR DR FR P N CA DR FR P CA DR HR P N CA DR HR P CA DR SV P N CA DR SV P CA Full Rate only Half Rate only Dual Rate Full Rate Preferred N o Changes Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request Dual Rate Full Rate Preferred C hanges Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request Dual Rate H alf Rate Preferred N o Changes Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request Dual Rate H alf Rate Preferred Changes Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request Dual Rate N o C hanges of channel rate Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request Dual Rate Changes of channel rate Allowed after first channel allocation as a result of the request

List of preferred speech version (optional):


GSM full rate speech version 1 = FR GSM full rate speech version 2 = EFR GSM full rate speech version 3 = AMR FR GSM half rate speech version 1 = HR GSM half rate speech version 3 = AMR HR FR TCHs only if only FR TRXs / FR+HR TCHs if some DR TRXs codec supported among: FR, EFR, AMR FR, HR, AMR HR
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 16

capabilities of the cell:


1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Allocation Process [cont.]

TCH Allocation NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO Yes TCH free? Select a TCH sub-pool Select a TCH in this sub-pool TCH selected Yes TCH queued Queuing? No TCH rejected No ALLOC_ANYWAY T11 T11_FORCED T_QHO

1 6 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The timer T11 corresponds to normal assignment with queuing authorised. The timer T11_FORCED corresponds to normal assignment:
either

when the queuing is not authorized by the MSC but forced by the BSC (QUEUE_ANYWAY = TRUE),

or when the queuing is not authorized but the request has its pre-emption indicator set and has already forced the release of a lower priority pre-emptable on-going call.

The QUEUE_ANYWAY flag is checked by the Normal Assignment (NASS) entity. The timer T_QHO corresponds to an external channel change with queuing authorized or to an external channel change when the queuing is not authorized but the request has its pre-emption indicator set and has already forced the release of a lower priority pre-emptable on-going call. NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO: Number of RTCHs reserved for incoming HO. These RTCHs cannot be allocated for call establishment. (from the user point of view, it can be better to avoid a drop rather than to allow a new call). ALLOC_ANYWAY: set to TRUE, it allows to use an RTS normally reserved (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO) for call establishment. But only after having passed by the queue. 3 queues: 3 different timers

for

incoming

HO

T11: maximum time a request can be kept in queue. T11_FORCED: maximum time a request can be kept in queue when the queue is forced. T_QHO: maximum time an incoming HO request can be kept in queue.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 17

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Sub-Pool Selection

The BSS selects the TCH sub-pools in which a TCH channel can be allocated according to:
The requested channel rate and the cell load situation
favour HR if cell is loaded

A priority given to generic resources


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. G1 pool (E-GSM mobile only) on non PS capable TRX GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool on non PS capable TRX GSM/DCS pure TCH - TCH/SPDCH pool on PS capable TRX G1 pool (E-GSM mobile only) on PS capable TRX GSM/DCS TCH/SDCCH pool

An optimisation of FR/HR resources


favour FR pool over DR pool for a FR TCH request favour HR pool over DR pool for an HR TCH request

The availability of a TCH channel in the sub-pool

1 6 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TCH allocation without list of preferred speech versions:


FR request: FR pool DR pool HR request: HR pool DR pool DR FR preferred request:


cell load=False: FR pool DR pool HR pool cell load=True: HR pool DR pool FR pool

DR HR Pref. request: HR pool DR pool FR pool

TCH allocation with a list of preferred speech versions:


FR SV then HR SV: FR pool DR pool HR HR SV then FR SV: HR pool DR pool FR FR SV only: FR pool DR pool HR SV only: HR pool DR pool

From B9 and due to the new feature Enhanced E-GSM band handling, a new parameter has to be set:
EGSM_RR_Alloc_Strategy = 0 (default) (Different behavior for EGSM-capable MS): The BSS handles differently EGSM capable MS from PGSM only capable MS in EGSM cells; this means that not all GSM900 MS in the network are assumed to be E-GSM capable. G1 and PGSM TRX are not managed in the same way. EGSM_RR_Alloc_Strategy = 1 (Same behavior for EGSM capable MS): The BSS handles in the same way PGSM capable only MS as EGSM-capable MS in EGSM cells; this means that all GSM900 MS in the network are assumed to be E-GSM capable. No difference made between a G1 TRX and a PGSM TRX.

So, if PGSM only capable MS have to be supported, the parameter must be set to the value 0. Otherwise 1. As (E)GPRS service was not supported on G1 TRX (B7.2, B8). Consequently, new pools have to be taken into account: Capable or not capable PS TRX in G1 and in GSM/DCS bands. Independently of the E-GSM preference, a TCH request is preferentially allocated firstly on TCH/VGCH timeslots, secondly on TCH/SPDCH/VGCH timeslots. Finally, TCH requests are served on TCH/SDCCH timeslots, which timeslots can also be used for All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 timeslots). SDCCH allocations (i.e. TCH requests are preferentially not served on TCH/SDCCH 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 VGCH: Voice Group Call Channel
Section 1 Module 6 Page 18

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Selection

PS traffic resources optimization


TCH allocated on TRX of highest TRX rank
and on TS of highest TS index SPDCH allocated on TRX of lowest TRX rank and on TS of lowest TS index

2 modes of TCH selection


On pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots On TCH/SPDCH timeslots

1 6 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TCH selection on pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots if:

there is at least one candidate TCH free on pure TCH TS there is no candidate TCH free on TCH/SPDCH TS: only the candidate TCH sub-channels available on pure TCH TS and on TCH/SDCCH TS are kept as candidate there is at least one candidate TCH free on a TCH/SPDCH TS there is no candidate TCH free on pure TCH TS: only the candidate TCH sub-channels available on TCH/SPDCH TS are kept as candidate

OR

TCH selection on TCH/SPDCH timeslots if:

AND

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 19

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH Selection on Pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH TS

The TCH is chosen from the selected sub-pool according to the following criteria:
TCH candidates of the selected TCH sub-pool Highest TRX_PREF_MARK

EN_MA_SELECTION = true

Biggest Mobile Allocation

Non hopping cell

Best Interference Band Highest TRX Identity Highest TS index FR allocation or HR allocation on busy TS

HR 0 TCH sub-channel

TCH selected

1 6 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The BSS attempts to offer the best quality of service for TCH calls in accordance with the privileged order between the groups of TRXs (if any) defined by the operator. Among a group of TRXs, the BSS attempts to allocate traffic channels that have the best quality characteristics (channels using frequency with low reuse factor, large hopping frequency sets, low measured interference). The benefits from this type of allocation are that the operator has the possibility to define groups of TRXs and to favor (or to disadvantage) them on the other if he wants to do so. Among a group of pure TCH or TCH/SDCCH timeslots, the overall interference is kept as low as possible, thus the user will perceive a better quality of service. The BSS chooses the best TCH among the sub-channels of the selected TCH sub-pool applying criteria below in the specified order of priority: 1. TCH on TS with the highest TRX Preference Mark

According to the frequency plan, the coverage and interference probability of a cell (or according to measurements), the operator may know which TRX should be a priori favored for TCH selection. For that purpose, it is possible for operators to give a preference mark to each TRX of a cell. This mark is given through the parameters TRX_PREF_MARK (TPM) changeable at OMC-R side per TRX. The range of TRX_PREF_MARK will be from 0 (lowest priority) to 7 (highest priority). The TCH selection function favors the channels with the highest TPM. Note that a few Pure TCH TS should be available in a cell on a TRX of TRX_PREF_MARK value of 0 since TCH/SPDCH TS may also be defined on this TRX according to PS radio resource configuration. Considering that the number of frequencies is a key factor for the average quality of channels, the TCH selection function favors the TS with the biggest MA (i.e. with the most frequencies in their frequency hopping sequence). This selection criterion is enabled/disabled via the flag EN_MA_SELECTION changeable at the OMC-R side on a per cell basis. Considering that the uplink received level measured by the BTS on an idle channel is a means to assess the quality when in connected mode, the TCH selection function favors the TS belonging to the best Interference Band (IB). Five IBs are defined through 5 parameters INTFBD1 to INTFBD5 where INTFBD(i)< INTFBD(i+1) and INTFBD5 = -47 all changeable at the OMC-R side on a per BTS basis.

2. TCH on TS with the biggest Mobile Allocation (for hopping cell only)

3. TCH on TS from the best Interference Band

4. TCH on TRX with the highest TRX identity 5. TCH on TS with the highest TS index 6. HR 0 TCH if the two sub-channels remaining candidates are the 2 HR TCHs of the same free TS

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 20

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

TCH selection on TCH/SPDCH TS

The TCH is chosen from the selected sub-pool according to the following criteria:
TCH candidates of the selected TCH sub-pool Highest TRX Rank Highest TS index

HR 0 TCH sub-channel

FR allocation or HR allocation on busy TS

TCH selected

TRX rank is determined by the TRX Ranking algorithm described in the GPRS & EGPRS Radio Algorithms Description training course

1 6 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The BSS tends to allocate to the MFS the TCH/SPDCH timeslots so as to avoid conflicts between CS and PS allocations on PS capable TRX. In order to be able to allocate as much slave PDCHs as possible to a given TBF, it is important to avoid any mix of allocation between TCHs and SPDCHs (e.g. avoid on a TRX a configuration such as TCH TCH SPDCH SPDCH TCH SPDCH SPDCH SPDCH). For that purpose, a TRX rank is assigned to each PS capable TRX. The TRX having the highest TRX rank is preferentially selected for TCH allocations, whereas TRX having the lowest TRX rank is preferentially selected for SPDCH allocations This rule only applies on PS capable TRX. On a given PS capable TRX, TCH are preferentially allocated on the right side of the TRX (highest TS index), whereas SPDCH are preferentially allocated on the left side (lowest TS index).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 21

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Exercise 1

A cell is configured on the OMC-R and TREs are mapped by BSS.


TRE G4 MP FR G4 MP DR G3 DR G4 MP FR G3 DR

TRX_PREF_ MARK 0 0 1 0 1 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5

0 BCC SDD SDC TCH TCH

1 SDC TCH TCH TCH TCH

2 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

3 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

4 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

5 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

6 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

7 TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

Time allowed: 10 minutes

1 6 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 22

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Exercise [cont.]

Find the radio TS configuration in RAM if NB_TS_MPDCH= 0


MPD PBC PSD PTC TSD TSP MPDCH Pure BCCH TS Pure SDCCH TS Pure TCH TS TCH/SDDCH TS TCH/SPDCH TS

TRX_PREF_ MARK 0 0 1 0 1
1 6 23

0 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5

TRE G4 MP FR G4 MP DR G3 DR G4 MP FR G3 DR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 23

1 TCH Resource Allocation Algorithm

Exercise [cont.]

Find which TCH sub-channel is allocated:


1. 2. 3. 4. For MS1: E-GSM, DR For MS2: GSM/DCS, DR For MS3: GSM, FR For MS4, MS5, ., MSn: E-GSM, DR n=?

Pure TCH TS TCH/SPDCH TS TCH/SDDCH TS as TCH TS F : FR TCH call H : HR TCH call P : SPDCH TS Cell load = true

TRX_Rank 2 3 1 TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 H

4 P

5 P H F P H

6 P

TRE GSM/FR

TSD

P F

P F P H

P F P

P F P F

F F P F H H

GSM/DR GSM/DR GSM/FR G1/DR

P H H

1 6 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 24

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 6 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 25

End of Module Resources Allocation Management

1 6 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Resources Allocation Management GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12206AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 6 Page 26

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


Module 7 Optimization Methodology
3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 1

Blank Page

172
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Estimate qualitatively the impact of parameters change

173
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

174
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Presentation 2 Examples and Exercises 2.1 Overview 2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms 2.3 Power Control Algorithms Optimization 2.4 Traffic Load Sharing Page 7 9 10 11 16 19

175
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

176
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 6

1 Presentation

177
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 7

1 Presentation

Justification

Tuning is not an exact science The optimizer has to control every parameter change and predict qualitatively what the consequences will be Note: Each change of parameter and its justification have to be registered in a database for operation convenience

178
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 8

2 Examples and Exercises

179
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 9

2 Examples and Exercises

2.1 Overview

Example 1: Optimization of handover algorithms


Sliding averaging window

Example 2: Optimization of power control algorithms


Sliding averaging window

Example 3: Traffic load sharing


Parameters qualitative influence

1 7 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 10

2 Examples and Exercises

2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms

Search for best tuning of HO parameters to decrease call drop

Call drop

HO/Call

1 7 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 11

2 Examples and Exercises

2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms [cont.]

Main Objective: make the HO algorithm as efficient as possible


Minimize call drop rate
trigger HO soon enough toward the best neighbour

While keeping a good speech quality


avoid HO due to quality: too late avoid having HO/call rate too high

1 7 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 12

2 Examples and Exercises

2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms [cont.]

Method
Collect Abis trace chart Search for HO level to avoid quality lower than 4 (or even 3)
sufficient number of bad quality samples low standard deviation problem when HO already activated
<R x Q u a l _ D L>=f(A V _ R x L e v_ D L ) <R x Q u a l _ U L>=f(A V _ R x L e v_ U L )

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

N b_sam ple s

N b_ sam ple s

600 400 200 0

1000 800 600 400 200 0

S t a n d a r d D e vi a t i o n

S t a n d a r d D e vi a t i o n

2 1 .5 1 0 .5 0

3 2 1 0

Then tune according to QoS indicators (OMC-R) by repetitive process


A_PBGT_HO/A_LEV_HO/A_QUAL_HO L_RXLEV_UL_H, L_RXLEV_DL_H, L_RXLEV_UL_P, L_RXLEV_DL_P OK as soon as HO success rate stabilized

1 7 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Never forget that Abis information takes into account the traffic distribution in the cell. Any parameter tuning done after an Abis study has to be checked periodically as the distribution in the cell can change from one week to another. Use the pivot table function (Excel) to build this graph.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 13

2 Examples and Exercises

2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms [cont.]

Neighbouring relationship cleanup


Remove useless relationships (A interface statistics, PM Type 180) Remove the common BCCH/BSIC couple Add new relationships when a new site is created

Finally, check the main QoS indicators


Call drop rate HO failure rate HO/call rate Radio Link Failure rate (the strong rate of radio link failure can denounce a lack of vicinity relation between cells)

1 7 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 14

2 Examples and Exercises

2.2 Optimization of Handover Algorithms [cont.]

According to the Abis results and some parameters already set, tune qualitatively the sliding averaging windows:

A_QUAL_HO A_LEV_HO

Level at RxQual=3 L_RXLEV_DL_H A_QUAL_HO A_LEV_HO

- 80 dBm - 85 dBm 6 ?

- 96 dBm - 90 dBm 6 ?

- 90 dBm - 90 dBm ? 4

Time allowed: 5 minutes

1 7 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 15

2 Examples and Exercises

2.3 Power Control Algorithms Optimization

Optimization of Downlink Power Control


Decrease of downlink interference Risks of delay of HO (without fast power control)

Optimization of Uplink Power Control


Decrease of Uplink interference MS battery saving Risks of delay of HO (without fast power control)

1 7 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 16

2 Examples and Exercises

2.3 Power Control Algorithms Optimization [cont.]

The main tuning problem is the interaction with handover, which can slow down HO decision, and debase call drop rate
Power control threshold must be within HO ones Dynamic step size must be activated if possible

1 7 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In the example below, a dynamic MS PC is activated. The MS power changes are really reactive and control the UL level between -80 and -90dBm. In this example, the HO threshold is -98 dBm.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 17

2 Examples and Exercises

2.3 Power Control Algorithms Optimization [cont.]

Explain qualitatively the impacts of some parameter changes

What happens if:


we increase POW_INC_FACTOR? we increase MAX_POW_INC? We increase A_LEV_PC?

Time allowed: 5 minutes

1 7 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 18

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing


Used to unload cell with too high traffic, without HW extension Trade-off between traffic sharing/radio quality Different algorithms

Fast Traffic Handover: Cause 28 Traffic Handover: Cause 23 and 12 with DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) Static (couple of cells): HO_MARGIN, LINK_FACTOR On a local traffic basis:
Load_Factor/Free_Factor Forced Directed Retry

1 7 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 19

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

Fast Traffic HO
Useful in case of sudden traffic peaks as the process response is instantaneous (no averaging window) The principle is to force handover towards neighbour cells which have lower traffic when a request is queued in the serving cell. Interaction with Forced DR due to the use of same thresholds Optimization method (repetitive process)
Tunes L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n), FREElevel_DR(n) Applies new values, checks traffic peaks, QoS indicators

1 7 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 20

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

The Pros and cons of Fast Traffic HO


Efficiency depends on:
Traffic location in the loaded cell Capacity of neighbour cells

Increase of the number of HO/call Increase of incoming HOs fail rate (risk of ping-pong effect) In case of internal HO: use PING_PONG_HCP with T_HCP or/and enable HO CAUSE 23 Heavy to tune (has to be done for each couple of cells) Adapted to instantaneous traffic modification Can be used to send traffic towards a cell external to the serving BSC Adapted to hierarchical network, but also to standard ones

1 7 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 21

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0,n) CHANGE DYNAMICALLY TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION WITH HO:


Traffic HO Cause 23

Ease outgoing better condition HO on a traffic point of view

Slow down outgoing better cell HO (to be tuned for a given couple of cells)

When the better cell in radio condition is the worst cell in traffic terms Tune DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN and DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN Apply new values, check traffic, QoS indicators and possibly speech quality

Optimization method (repetitive process)

1 7 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 22

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

The Pros and cons of DELTA_HO_MARGIN (0,n) method


Efficiency depends on:
Traffic location in the loaded cell Cells overlap Capacity of neighbour cells

Increase the number of HO/call Cannot be used to send traffic toward a cell external to the serving BSC The call has to be first established on a loaded cell, before being exported
It can be rejected

Easy to tune (dynamic process) Adaptability to instantaneous and long-term traffic modifications

1 7 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 23

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]


HO_MARGIN / LINK_FACTOR CHANGE STATICALLY TRAFFIC DISTRIBUTION WITH HO:


Ease outgoing better cell HO (to be tuned for a given couple of cells)

Decrease HO_MARGIN (can make a cell candidate) Increase LINK_FACTOR (used to rank candidate cells) Look for neighbour cells able to carry extra traffic Use Abis trace to check if these cells are candidate

Optimization method (repetitive process)


if yes, use LINK_FACTOR to favor them if not, use HO_MARGIN and LINK_FACTOR

Apply new values, check traffic, QoS indicators and possibly speech quality

1 7 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 24

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

The Pros and cons of LINK_FACTOR/HO_MARGIN


Can be efficient (up to 20% increase of capacity) in some cases
Cell overlap Capacity of neighbour cells

Increase the number of HO/call The call has to be first established on a loaded cell, before being exported
It can be rejected

Heavy to tune (has to be done for each couple of cells) No adaptability to instantaneous and long-term traffic modifications Can be used to send traffic toward a cell external to the serving BSC

1 7 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 25

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]


FREE_FACTOR/LOAD_FACTOR Taking into account the current load of cells, send the MS toward the less loaded cell with HO
Ease outgoing better cell HO, according to:
Load_Factor (% of TCH occupancy) of serving and target cells Free_Factor (number of free TCHs) of serving and target cells (order only) cannot make a candidate cell, only change ranking

Tuning method (repetitive)


to be activated locally for each cell with default parameter setting look for QoS indicators (esp. traffic intensity and blocking rate) tune tables accordingly

1 7 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 26

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

The Pros and cons of load/free factors method


Lower efficiency compared to LINK_FACTOR/HO_MARGIN Calls have to be established on a loaded cell before being exported Tuning is performed on a cell-per-cell basis Cannot be used to send traffic toward an external cell Adapted to dynamic change of traffic and capacity (for Load_Factor) No increase of HO/call rate

1 7 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 27

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

Forced directed retry method


Mechanisms
The MS is connected on an SDCCH of cell1 It must switch on TCH No TCH is free on cell1 There is at least 1 neighbour cell which has:

sufficient DL level seen by the MS enough free TCHs if there are several cells, the one with the best PBGT is selected

The MS is handed over to TCH towards this cell

1 7 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 28

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

Method: trade-off between traffic and radio quality


Mainly L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) parameter to tune
the lower, the better the traffic sharing the lower, the higher the interference risks
4

QoS indicators and field tests (speech quality) are necessary for tuning

el

C e ll 1 :2
C

l 2 : 45

Ce

ll 3 : 2 3

1 7 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Forced Directed Retry

The following condition is checked every measurement reporting period and if at least one input pre-processed parameter AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is available.

CAUSE = 20 (high level in neighbour cell for forced directed retry)

AV_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) (n = 1 ... BTSnum)

and EN_FORCED_DR = ENABLE

The threshold L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) is the observed level from the neighbour cell n at the border of the area where forced directed retry is enabled. This threshold fixes the size of the overlapping area where forced directed retry can be performed. It should be greater than RXLEVmin(n).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 29

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

The Pros and cons of Forced directed retry


Highest efficiency (up to 30%) No increase of HO/call rate Can be used to send traffic toward an external cell Adapted to dynamic change of traffic Adapted to hierarchical networks, but also to standard ones Tuning is performed on a cell-per-cell basis

1 7 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 30

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

Draw qualitatively the new serving areas on the pseudo map when enabling traffic HO with:
DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN=6dB DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN=4dB
Time allowed: 5 minutes
Traffic_load

Cause 12

Cause 12

EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 0

PBGT(0)

Loaded cell 0
5 PBGT(0) = 5 0 5 PBGT(n) = 5

Unloaded cell n

PBGT(n)

1 7 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 31

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

What happens when EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = ENABLE and EN_TRAFFIC_HO(n,0) = DISABLE?


Time allowed: 5 minutes

Traffic_load

Queued Assignment Request

Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82 dBm

Av_Rxlev_Ncell(0) = -74 dBm Av_Rxlev_PBGT_HO = -82 dBm L_RLEV_NCELL_DR(n) = -85 dBm

PBGT(0)

Loaded cell 0
5 PBGT(0) = 5 0 5 PBGT(n) = 5

Unloaded cell n

PBGT(n)

1 7 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 32

2 Examples and Exercises

2.4 Traffic Load Sharing [cont.]

What happens when EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO = ENABLE and EN_TRAFFIC_HO(n,0) = ENABLE?


Time allowed: 5 minutes
Traffic_load

Queued Assignment Request

Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82 dBm

Av_Rxlev_Ncell(0) = -74 dBm Av_Rxlev_PBGT_HO = -82 dBm

PBGT(0)

Loaded cell 0
9 PBGT(0) = 9 5 -1 0 PBGT(n) = -1
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Unloaded cell n
5

PBGT(n)

1 7 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 33

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 7 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 34

End of Module Optimization Methodology

1 7 35
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Optimization Methodology GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12207AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 7 Page 35

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

Module 8 Case Studies

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 1

Blank Page

182
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
propose a set of parameters to solve typical radio problems

183
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

184
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Theoretical Presentation 2 Eight Case Studies 2.1 Tunnel Case 2.2 Radar Case 2.3 Tower Case 2.4 Resurgence Case 2.5 Forest Case 2.6 Highway Case 2.7 TCH/SDCCH Congestion Case 2.8 Indoor Cell Congestion Case Page 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

185
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!

186
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 6

1 Theoretical Presentation

187
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 7

1 Theoretical Presentation

Justification

Some typical problems due to particular field configuration always occur in a GSM network

188
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 8

2 Eight Case Studies

189
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 9

2 Eight Case Studies

2.1 Tunnel Case


Radiating cable in a tunnel Question:


Risks of such a configuration Tune the right parameters for the tunnel cell Catch quickly car traffic Avoid the pedestrian traffic
Indoor BTS

Outdoor BTS Pedestrian mobile

1 8 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 10

2 Eight Case Studies

2.2 Radar Case

Radar situation
A radar cell situated on top of a hill provides a wide coverage area. An industrial zone in the valley is covered by small cells but also by the radar cell. The serving areas in the IZ are not clearly defined.

Objective
Give a parameter set to prevent the radar cell from catching any traffic in the industrial zone by HO assignment

1 8 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 11

2 Eight Case Studies

2.3 Tower Case

Tower situation
The indoor mobile selects in idle mode the outdoor cell (same LA)

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid that effect

Indoor antenna

Indoor mobile

O u t do o r c el l
1 8 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 12

2 Eight Case Studies

2.4 Resurgence Case

Resurgence situation
In rural network, especially in hilly landscape, many resurgences occur from very far cells.
25 Km
C e ll A

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid radio link establishment to those cells and TCH traffic on those cells
Ce ll B

Resurgence from cell A

1 8 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 13

2 Eight Case Studies

2.5 Forest Case

Forest situation: a highway crosses a forest


High call drop rate (radio cause) on the cell and drive tests: strong level attenuation at the entrance of the forest

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid radio link failure
Forest (ATT = 10 dB every 100 m)

-90 dBm

-75 dBm

Hi

gh

ay

BTS

1 8 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 14

2 Eight Case Studies

2.6 Highway Case

Highway situation:
A highway is slightly covered (best coverage on 200m) by an orthogonal cell (cell C on the map)

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid traffic in the orthogonal cell

1 8 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 15

2 Eight Case Studies

2.7 TCH/SDCCH Congestion Case

SDCCH congestion situation


A railway station is located at the frontier of two LAs. Every train stopping in this station comes from LA 1 and then returns to LA 1 after the stop.

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid SDCCH congestion on cell B (LA 2)

C e ll B
LA 2

LA 1

C e ll A

LA f

ron tie r

1 8 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 16

2 Eight Case Studies

2.8 Indoor Cell Congestion Case

An indoor microcell has been introduced within a multi-layer network (macro + micro) When the indoor microcell is congested, FDR may not be working as some the MSs can be covered only by this cell
Define parameter settings to find a good solution in case of indoor cell congestion

Macro-Cell

Macro-Cell

Macro-Cell

Micro-cells

City center

1 8 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 17

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 8 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 18

End of Module Case Studies

1 8 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Case Studies GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12208AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 8 Page 19

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

Module 9 Annexes

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 1

Blank Page

192
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

Document History Edition 01 Date YYYY-MM-DD Author Last name, first name Remarks First edition

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 2

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:

193
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 3

Module Objectives [cont.]

194
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 4

Table of Contents
Switch to notes view!
1 Erlang B law 2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process 3 Load & Traffic evaluation 4 Handover Management 5 LCS 6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation 7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells Page 7 21 26 37 46 63 73

195
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 5

Table of Contents [cont.]


Switch to notes view!
Page

196
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 6

1 Erlang B law

197
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 7

1 Erlang B law

Erlang definition

ERLANG: unit used to quantify traffic


Erlang definition

T=

resource usage duration (Erlang) total observation duration

Example: 1 TCH is observed during 1 hour one can observe 1 call of 80 sec and 1 call of 100 sec the observed traffic is T = (80+100)/3600 = 0.05 ERLANG

198
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 8

1 Erlang B law

Call mix definition

ERLANG <-> CALL MIX CALL MIX EXAMPLE 350 call/hour 3 LU/call TCH duration: 85 sec SDCCH duration: 4.5 sec

ERLANG COMPUTATION TCH = (350 * 85)/3600 = 8.26 ERLANG SDCCH = [ (350 + 350*3) * 4.5 ] / 3600 = 1.75 ERLANG

199
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

350 calls * 85 sec / 1 hour(3600 sec):

TCH = (350 * 85)/3600 = 8.26 ERLANGS

350 calls means 350 SDCCH phases. 3 LU/call means 3 * 350 LUs so 1050 SDCCH phases more. 1 SDCCH phase is 4.5 sec:

SDCCH = [ (350 + 350*3) * 4.5 ] / 3600 = 1.75 ERLANG

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 9

1 Erlang B law

Erlang B (1/5)

Erlang B law Relationship between offered traffic number of resources blocking rate In a telecom system, call arrival frequency is ruled by the POISSON LAW

Call
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 97

Second

1 9 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The offered traffic is the traffic asked by the customers. The graph gives the number of connection requests per second during 35 seconds. 83/30s => 83 * 2 * 60 = about 10 000 / hour Real example in Paris on 1 BSC (LA FOURCHE).

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 10

1 Erlang B law

Erlang B (2/5)

Call request arrival rate (and leaving) is not stable Number of resources = average number of requests * mean duration Is sometime not sufficient => probability of blocking => 1 Erlang B law Pblock: blocking probability N: number of resources E: offered traffic [Erlang] Good approximation when the blocking rate is low (< 5%)

Erlang B law

E Pblock =
N k=0

N! E k!
k

1 9 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 11

1 Erlang B law

Erlang B (3/5)

There is two different ways to use this law Using Abacus Using SW (here Excel) Pblock = f (T, Nc) Offered = f (Nc, Pblock) Channels = f (T, Pblock)

1 9 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 12

1 Erlang B law

Erlang B (4/5)

Example: We have a BTS of 8 TRXs (about 60 channels (Nc)) We do not want more than 2% of blocking (Pblock) => The traffic is not to be greater than 50 Erlangs (T) 83% of resources used to reach 2% of blocking

1 9 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 13

1 Erlang B law

Erlang B (5/5)

But be careful, the law is not linear: In B4, we use for example a combined BCCH with a micro BTS. 4 SDCCHs, Pblock = 2% => T = 1.1 E 25% of resources used to reach 2% of blocking In B5, if we decide to provide SMSCB (Cell Broadcast information) 1 subchannel SDCCH is therefore used. 3 SDCCHs, Pblock = 2% => T = 0.6 E 25% of resources less => 50% of Traffic less !!

1 9 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 14

1 Erlang B law

Cell dimensioning (1/5)

CELL DIMENSIONING Given an Offered traffic, compute the number of TRXs (and SDCCHs) needed to carry it Default blocking rate RTCH: 2% SDCCH: 0.5% (TTCH: 0.1%)

1 9 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 15

1 Erlang B law

Cell dimensioning (2/5)

CELL DIMENSIONING To handle an offered traffic of 12 Erlangs (TCH), compute the number of channels, then the number of TRXs Channels (12;2%) = 19 Example: 3 TRXs , 21 TCHs, 1 BCCH, 2 SDCCH8

1 9 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 16

1 Erlang B law

Cell dimensioning (3/5)

CELL DIMENSIONING, based on field measurement One is measuring a traffic of 15 Erlangs, with a blocking rate of 10% How to dimension the cell? Offered traffic = 15 / (1-10%) = 16.7 Erlangs !!!! Channels (16.7;2%) -> 25 TCHs -> 4 TRXs needed

1 9 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 17

1 Erlang B law

Cell dimensioning (4/5)

FORECASTING TRAFFIC/CRITICAL TRAFFIC Traffic forecasting must be calculated according to offered traffic not directly on measured traffic In order to plan necessary actions soon enough, one must calculate regularly the date when the traffic of a cell will become critical Critical traffic: when offered traffic will induce 2% of blocking

1 9 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 18

1 Erlang B law

Cell dimensioning (5/5)

WARNING: in case of too high blocking rate

First check that there is no outage on the BTS Before starting a dimensioning/tuning action

1 9 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 19

1 Erlang B law

Training exercise
Training exercise Complete this form in order to get less than 2% of blocking in all cases.

Cell Call mix info


450 call/hour Mean TCH call duration: 80 sec Blocking rate TCH: 0.8% 330 call/hour Mean TCH call duration: 129 sec Blocking rate TCH: 4% 600 call/hour Mean TCH call duration: 96 sec Blocking rate TCH: 8%

Erlang TCH offered traffic


10.08 Erlang TCH

Traffic forecast
30% offered traffic increase

Proposed configuration
13.1 Erlang TCH -> 20 TCH 3 TRX

12,743

12,675

30% offered traffic increase

12,865

30% offered traffic increase

1 9 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

cell

call mix info

Erlang TCH

traffic forecast

proposed config

12, 743 450 call/hour 10 Erlang TCH mean TCH call duration : 80 sec (450*80)/3600 blocking rate TCH : 0.8% =10 10/.992=10.08 1 12,675 330 call/hour (330*129)/360 mean TCH call duration 129 0 sec =11.825/0.96 blocking rate 4% =12.3177 12,865 600 call/hour (600*96)/3600 mean TCH call duration 96 =16/.92 = 17.4 sec blocking rate 8 %

30 % TCH increase 13,1 Erlang TCH - > 20 TCH 10,081*1.3=13.1 3 TRX 30 % TCH increase 16 Erlang TCH -> 24 TCH 12.3177*1.3 =16 4 TRX 30 % TCH increase 22.6 Erlang TCH -> 31 TCH 17.4*1.3 = 22.6 5 TRX

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 20

2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process

1 9 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 21

2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process

(1/4)

Signal decoding process In a GSM system, the number of frames that are not erased are sent as an input to the voice decoder

Air Demod. Decoder

Inside the mobile station Deinterleave Error Correction Frame Erasure Decision Voice Decoder

Encoder

RXQUAL

Frame Erasure Rate

1 9 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 22

2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process

(2/4)

Quality impact of frequency hopping on the reception chain In non-hopping networks, the RXQUAL and voice quality are correlated In hopping networks, the voice quality is sooner correlated to the FER. This is due to interferer averaging and due to the non-linear mapping of BER to RXQUAL values.

1 9 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 23

2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process

(3/4)

Quality impact of frequency hopping on the reception chain FER is improved when frequency hopping is activated (cyclic or random) RxQual is not impacted whereas the speech quality is better

RxQ Average 1.4 1.2

FER Average 2.50% 2.00%

1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 Ref Cyclic Random 0.50% 0.00%


RxQ Average FER Average

1.50% 1.00%

1 9 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 24

2 Frequency Hopping influence on PCHO process

Conclusion (4/4)

Conclusion When frequency hopping is activated We can accept in Power Control and Handover processes, a threshold increase: OFFSET_HOPPING_PC and OFFSET_HOPPING_HO

1 9 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 25

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

1 9 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 26

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Cell TCH radio resource evaluation usage

Load evaluation
Short term Medium term

Period

Usage
FREEfactor LOADfactor Speed discrimination for hierarchical network Full Rate/Half Rate channel allocation Power budget Handover Traffic Handover Multiband capture Handover General capture Handover

TCH_INFO_PERIOD

LOAD_EV_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD

Long term

N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD

1 9 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 27

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Load evaluation (1/5)

Medium term measurement of the load of a cell Corresponds to function AV_LOAD(cell) A new sample of the Nb free TCH in the cell is available every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds AV_LOAD() is a non-sliding window load average from Nb free TCH samples updated every LOAD_EV_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec

TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec Nb of free TCHs LOADfactors FREEfactors Non-sliding average

Load evaluation

LOAD_EV_PERIOD

1 9 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 28

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Load evaluation (2/5)

AV_LOAD(cell n) calculated from N Nb free TCH samples available during LOAD_EV_PERIOD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec
AV_LOADdefinition
Nsamples

1 AV_LOAD = Nsamples

i=1

(1 -

Nb free TCH (n) ) x 100 Nb total TCH (n)

LOADfactors and FREEfactors also determined from Nb free TCH samples every TCH_INFO_PERIOD seconds (short term evaluation) LOADlevels are boundaries of load intervals associating a LOADfactor (db) to a Nb of free TCH samples FREElevels are boundaries of Nb of free TCH intervals associating a FREEfactor (db) to a Nb of free TCH samples
1 9 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 29

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Load evaluation (3/5)

LOADfactor determination:

t = (1 - Nb free TCH/Total Nb TCH) x 100 t <= LOADlevel_1 LOADlevel_1 < t <= LOADlevel_2 LOADlevel_2 < t <= LOADlevel_3 LOADlevel_3 < t <= LOADlevel_4 LOADlevel_4 < t

LOADfactor LOADfactor_1 LOADfactor_2 LOADfactor_3 LOADfactor_4 LOADfactor_5

LOADlevel in % LOADfactor in dB

1 9 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 30

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Load evaluation (4/5)

FREEfactor determination:
Nb free TCH t <= FREElevel_1 FREElevel_1 < t <= FREElevel_2 FREElevel_2 < t <= FREElevel_3 FREElevel_3 < t <= FREElevel_4 FREElevel_4 < t FREEfactor FREEfactor_1 FREEfactor_2 FREEfactor_3 FREEfactor_4 FREEfactor_5

FREElevel in absolute number of TCH FREEfactor in dB

1 9 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 31

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Load evaluation (5/5)

Example: cells with 4 TRXs (28 TCHs)


LOADfactor +10 dB +5 dB 0 dB -10 dB -15 dB Nb free TCH t <= 3 3 < t <= 8 8 < t <= 15 15 < t <= 21 21 < t FREEfactor -16 dB -8 dB 0 dB +7 dB +10 dB t <= 10% 10% < t <= 25% 25% < t <= 50% 50% < t <= 80% 80% < t

Load = (1 - Nb free TCH/Total Nb TCH) x 100

In cell evaluation of cell n for outgoing HO from cell 0: Load = 28.6% LOADfactor(0) = -15 dBm LOADfactor(n) = 0 dBm In GRADE(n): + LOADfactor(n) = +0 = 0 dB FREEfactor(0) = -8 dBm FREEfactor(n) = +7 dBm In ORDER(n): + FREEfactor(n) FREEfacfor(0) = +7 (-8) = +15 dB C C
e ll 0 e ll n

Nb free TCHs = 4 Load = 85.7%

HO

Nb free TCHs = 20

1 9 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 32

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Traffic evaluation (1/4)

Long term measurement of the load of a cell Corresponds to function Traffic_load(cell) Traffic_load() value is determined from a number N_TRAFFIC_LOAD of consecutive non-sliding window load averages AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD calculated from Nb of free TCH samples updated every A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec

TCH_INFO_PERIOD sec Nb of free TCHs LOADfactors FREEfactors A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD non-sliding average)

Traffic evaluation

TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD

1 9 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 33

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Traffic evaluation (2/4)


HIGH_ TRAFFIC_LOAD LOW_ TRAFFIC_LOAD IND_ TRAFFIC_LOAD

Load samples

Averaging on A_TRAFFIC_LOAD load samples

AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Thresolds comparison with N_TRAFFIC_LOAD averages

Traffic load

3 possible values for Traffic_load(): high, low, indefinite Initialization: Traffic_load() = indefinite Traffic_load() becomes: High if the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD consecutive AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load averages are all greater than HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD threshold Low if the last N_TRAFFIC_LOAD consecutive AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load averages are all lower than LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD threshold

1 9 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 34

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Traffic evaluation (3/4)


Traffic_load() becomes indefinite if: Traffic_load() was high and the last AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load average is lower than LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD (or IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD if not 0%) Traffic_load() was low and the last AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD load average is greater than HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD (or IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD if not 0%) Traffic_load(n) is always equal to indefinite if cell n is external to BSC HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD

1 9 35
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 35

3 Load & Traffic evaluation

Traffic evaluation (4/4)

Example with N_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 3


Variation of AV_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Traffic_load = high Traffic_load = high Traffic_load = indefinite

HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Traffic_load = indefinite

IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Traffic_load = indefinite

LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD
Traffic_load = low Traffic_load = low Traffic_load = indefinite

IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <> 0

IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0

1 9 36
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 36

4 Handover Management

1 9 37
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 37

4 Handover Management

Principles

Handover Management made up of: Cell Filtering Process (according to call history) Handover Decision (according to the best cell in the list) Handover Management followed by: Handover Protocol

1 9 38
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

BTS

BSC
HO Preparation

Radio Link Measurements

Active Channel Pre-processing

HO Detection

HO Candidate Cell Evaluation

HO management

HO protocol

MSC

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 38

4 Handover Management

Global Handover Process

Handover preparation
Candidate cell evaluation

Handover management
Cell filtering process

Handover protocol
External or internal channel change

Handover detection

Handover decision

Raw cell list

Ordered target cell list

Filtered target cell list

Execution target cell list

1 9 39
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 39

4 Handover Management

Cell Lists usage

Three cell lists: Ordered target Cell list target cells provided by Candidate Cell Evaluation REJ_CELL_LIST cells internally rejected by the MSC or BSC MS_CELL_REJ_LIST cells to which the MS failed to hand over

1 9 40
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Since B6 release, some changes have been provided to the HO management process which is in charge of the HO execution triggering, when the need of handover is detected by the HO preparation process. These changes are :

use of the T_FILTER parameter in a different way than for B5, the parameter NBR_HO_ATTEMPTS which was used for internal HO in B5 is removed, use of the T7 parameter and of the REJ_CELL_LIST list also for internal HO in B7, same behavior in case of internal and external HO in B7, immediate attempt after rejection or failure without waiting for a new alarm in case of internal and external HO in B7, implicit rejection of cells in B7 with the help of the target cell identity in the HO command received from the MSC.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 40

4 Handover Management

Timers usage

T_FILTER: controls the global handover procedure started: when a cell list is to be sent by Candidate Cell Evaluation expiry empty target cell list sent to the Handover Management T7: controls the clean-up of REJ_CELL_LIST started: when a target cell list is to be sent to Handover Protocol expiry empty REJ_CELL_LIST T_MS_CELL_REJ: clean-up of MS_CELL_REJ_LIST started: when an MS reports a failure to seize the target channel expiry empty MS_CELL_REJ_LIST T_HO_REQ_LOST: to supervise answer of MSC (no HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT message sent) Started: HO REQUIRED sent Stopped: HO COMMAND received Expiry external channel change procedure is terminated.

1 9 41
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

If the candidate cell list provided by the candidate cell evaluation process is different from the previous one (the number of cells is different or same number of cells but new cells in the list), an alarm is sent to the HOM process. In B7, if T_FILTER expires, it means that the HO is no more necessary. For both internal and external HOs in case of HO failure from the MS, the cell is filtered until the expiry of the T_MS_CELL_REJ timer. When the T_MS_CELL_REJ timer expires, the rejected cell may be a candidate. In B7 release, T7 timer is used to manage the REJ_CELL_LIST list and a subsequent HO REQUIRED can be sent to the MSC before T7 expiry if the target cell list has changed (new cell or removed cell). The REJ_CELL_LIST list is used for both internal and external Hos. T_HO_REQD_LOST Expiry

This timer is used to supervise response from the MSC. It is started when sending the first HANDOVER REQUIRED to the MSC and it is stopped in the following cases: when HANDOVER COMMAND is received from the MSC or

when HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT is received from the MSC only if the same number of HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT messages have been received from the MSC than the number of HANDOVER REQUIRED messages sent to the MSC for this channel change procedure) (i.e. no message crossing over A interface).

In case where more HANDOVER REQUIRED messages have been sent to the MSC, the timer T_HO_REQD_LOST is not stopped upon HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT receipt, as there is no way for the BSC to know if the received HANDOVER REQUIRED REJECT is a response to the last HANDOVER REQUIRED message or a response to a previous one (message crossing over A interface). On expiry, an O&M error report is raised only when no message has been received from the MSC since the last HANDOVER REQUIRED message, and the external channel change procedure is terminated.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 41

4 Handover Management

Handover Execution Process

Handover preparation
Filtered target cell list Cell 4 Cell 2 Cell 8 Cell filtering process remove cells previously rejected from MSC or BSC remove cells previously rejected for MS failure reason remove cells not suitable due to O&M reason Filtered target cell list Cell 2 Handover decision Relevant handover protocol is chosen according to the type of GSM procedure ongoing and the first target cell of the list T7 is started

Handover protocol
Internal Handover

Internal Handover

List of cells previously rejected from MSC or BSC Cell 4 REJ_CELL_LIST list cleared at T7 expiry

List of cells previously rejected for MS failure Cell 8 MS_CELL_REJ_LIST list cleared at T_MS_CELL_REJ expiry

1 9 42
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 42

4 Handover Management

HO execution example
Handover management
Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 Rejected lists MS empty BSC/MSC empty Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3

Handover protocol
HO fails on cell 1 ROC

Update

Cell 1 -> MS rejected list

Handover management
Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 Rejected lists MS cell 1 BSC/MSC empty Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3

Update

Handover protocol
HO fails on cell 2 ROC

Update

T_MS_CELL_REJ expires MS rejected list empty

Cell 2 -> MS rejected list Cell 1 -> BSC rejected list

Handover management
Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3 Rejected lists MS cell 2 BSC/MSC cell 1 Ordered target cell list Cell 1 Cell 2 Cell 3

Handover protocol
HO to cell 3

1 9 43
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 43

4 Handover Management

T_FILTER controls HO procedure (1/2)

End of Handover procedure = T_FILTER timer expiry T_FILTER restarted each time a target cell list is to be sent by Candidate Cell Evaluation to the Handover Management (same list than the one previously sent or not) The target cell list is sent to the Handover Management if different from the last target cell list previously sent T_FILTER expiry means no handover is needed anymore

1 9 44
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 44

4 Handover Management

T_FILTER controls HO procedure (2/2)

No Handover is on-going

New candidate cell list from the candidate cell evaluation function

A Handover is on-going

No Is T_FILTER running? Start T_FILTER: an HO alarm containing the candidate cell is sent to the HO management entity No

Yes

Yes

Is the candidate cell list different from the previous one? Restart T_FILTER: an HO alarm containing the candidate cell is sent to the HO management entity Restart T_FILTER

A Handover is now on-going

T_FILTER is restarted each time the alarm is still on

1 9 45
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 45

5 LCS

1 9 46
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 46

5 LCS

Definitions

New end-user services which provide the geographical location of an MS: On MS request to know its own location On network request (especially during Emergency calls) On external request (LCS Client) Several positioning methods: Cell-ID or Cell-ID + TA (Timing Advance) Conventional (standalone) GPS Assisted GPS (with A-GPS server help to compute location)
MS-based (MB): the MS is able to perform a pre-computation MS-assisted (MA): the MS sends info, Network computes

1 9 47
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Assisted GPS Method:

Mobile-based: The MS performs OTD signal measurements and computes its own location estimate. In this case, the network provides the MS with the additional information such as BTS coordinates and the RTD values. These assistance data can be either broadcast on the CBCH (using SMSCB function) or provided by the BSS in a pointto-point connection (either spontaneously or on request from the MS). Mobile-assisted: The MS performs and reports OTD signal measurements to the network and the network computes the MSs location estimate. With

OTD: Observed Time Difference: the time interval that is observed by an MS between the receptions of signals (bursts) from two different BTSs. RTD: Real Time Difference: This means the relative synchronization difference in the network between two BTSs.

Finally, 4 methods are possible for positioning:

Cell ID+ TA. This is the simplest method for determining the location of a mobile. It relies on the hypothesis that the geographical coverage of a cell corresponds to that predicted by radio coverage studies. When an active mobile is connected to a base station, the mobile is assumed to be located geographically within the area predicted to be best served by this base station

Conventional (MS equipped with GPS System). MS-based Assisted GPS. MS-Assisted GPS.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 47

5 LCS

Architecture
1 MS Request 2 Network Request 3 External Request A-GPS : Assisted GPS GMLC : Gateway Mobile Location Center LCS : Location Services SMLC : Serving Mobile Location Center

1
Where am I?
BTS

Abis

2
Emergency call
A

3
OSP GMLC
Lh

Where is the accident?


Lg

Where is my son?
Le

BSC
Abis

MSC

External LCS client

BTS

Lb

HLR

SMLC function integrated in MFS: - receives the location request from the GMLC through the MSC/BSC - schedules all the necessary actions to get MS location - computes MS location - provides the result back to the GMLC

MFS SMLC

SAGI

A-GPS server
1 9 48
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

GPS receivers reference network

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 48

5 LCS

LCS Positioning Procedure

Provide subscriber location 5

BTS BSC

Paging, authentication, ciphering, notification 4

MSC

Provide subscriber location 3

OSP GMLC

Location request 1

BTS

6 Individual positioning

Location report

2 Routing information

8 Location response

MFS SMLC

HLR

1 9 49
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

If the MS is in idle mode, the MSC first performs a CS paging, authentication and ciphering in order to establish an SDCCH with the MS. The MS subscriber is not aware of it, i.e. no ringing tone, except towards GPRS MS in Packet Transfer Mode which may suspend its GPRS traffic in order to answer to the CS Paging (i.e. not fully transparent for the subscriber). When the MS is in dedicated mode (after a specific SDCCH establishment for location, or during an on-going call), the MSC sends the location request to the BSC in the existing SCCP connection for the current call, which forwards it to the SMLC.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 49

5 LCS

LCS Protocols

Target MS RRLP (04.31)

BSC

SMLC (MFS) RRLP (04.31)

Relay RR (04.18) BSSLAP RR BSSAP-LE L2 (LAPDm) L1 L2 (LAPDm) L1 L2-GSL L1-GSL

BSSLAP (08.71) BSSAP-LE (09.31) L2-GSL L1-GSL

Um

Lb

1 9 50
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 50

5 LCS

LCS Protocols [cont.]

Example: Mobile terminated location request success (External request)


MS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR LCS client

LCS Service Request Send_Routing_Info request Send_Routing_Info response Provide_Subscriber_Location Paging Authentication + Ciphering BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request

Starts T_Location
Adequate positioning method chosen by SMLC with optional additional scenario

BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Request

BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response BSSMAP Perform_Location_Response

Stop T_Location

Provide_Subscriber_Location Result LCS Service Response

MSSMAP Clear Command and Release

1 9 51
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

T_location_Longer used in case of optional additional scenario (see graph): Upon receipt of the MS POSITION COMMAND message from the SMLC (optional additional scenario), the BSC stops the T_Location timer, and starts instead the T_Location_Longer timer. This timer is stopped only at the end of the location procedure in the BSC, i.e. when an 08.08 PERFORM LOCATION RESPONSE message is sent back to the MSC. Aborts:

Abort by MSC

Depending on the location procedure and its current state of execution, upon PERFORM LOCATION ABORT message receipt, the BSC sends immediately to the MSC a PERFORM LOCATION RESPONSE message (when no exchange on the Lb interface is ongoing), or to the SMLC either a PERFORM LOCATION ABORT or an ABORT message. The BSC starts the timer T_Loc_abort to supervise the SMLC response.

Abort by BSS

The BSC must send either a PERFORM LOCATION ABORT message or a ABORT message to the SMLC and starts the timer T_Loc_abort, if an ongoing location request is interrupted at the BSC level for the following reasons:

by an inter-BSC handover, or if the main signaling link to the target MS is lost or released, or the SCCP connection on the A interface is released, or if the timer T_Location expires,

The useful B8 content of the received PERFORM LOCATION REQUEST message is:

Location type, Classmark information 3, Requested QoS: provides service requirement concerning geographic positioning and response time

accuracy, the response time category (Low Delay or Delay Tolerant),

Current Cell Id + TA information are always provided to the SMLC.

The time of transfer of the assitance data on the SDCCH is estimated about 14s for a 1000 octets information.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 51

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: CI+TA Positioning

Principles of CI + TA Positioning Method


LCS_LATITUDE

3dB point given by the azimuth and the HPBW

HALFP WR

_B

EA M

_W
TH ID

LCS_AZIMUTH (Main Beam Direction given by the azimuth) MS estimated location

TA
LCS_LONGITUDE
553 m

g vin Ser

ce ll ( CI)

3dB point given by the azimuth and the HPBW


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1 9 52
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

With the TA positioning method, no signaling exchange is required between the SMLC and the MS (i.e. RRLP protocol is not required). The TA positioning method is applicable to all the MSs (supporting LCS or not). Based on:

Cell Identity (CI) of the serving cell and Timing Advance (TA) value reported by MS

intersection point of a line from the BTS antenna in its main direction with a circle which radius is corresponding with the propagation delay (timing advance) is the MS estimated position Omni-directional cells: MS position = site position Parameters:

EN_LCS flag to enable/disable the Location Services per BSS

0 = Enabled; 1= Disabled; Default = 0 IF EN_LCS=1, CI+TA method is enabled in all the BSS cells

LCS_LATITUDE: Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell LCS_LONGITUDE: Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell LCS_AZIMUTH: Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH: Antenna half power beamwidth for the sector supporting the cell

Optimization parameters: ARC_SIZE_FACTOR: Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR: Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR: Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method.
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 52

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: Conventional Positioning

Conventional GPS location procedure


This optional location procedure is chosen by the SMLC (if the MS supports it) upon reception of a Perform Location Request message from the BSC

MS

BTS

BSC Perform Location Request

SMLC

Location Request

Measurement Position Request

(X,Y) Location Response

Measurement Position Response (X,Y) Perform Location Response (X,Y)

(X,Y): computed position

1 9 53
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The MS continuously computes its position. The terminal searches for satellites, acquires all the GPS data, computes its own position and finally provides the location estimation to the SMLC.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 53

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: Assisted GPS Positioning

Assisted GPS Positioning Method (A-GPS)


Assisted GPS Positioning Method is split into:
MS Based A-GPS method MS Assisted A-GPS method

Assistance data on request


- GPS acquisition assistance - Navigation model (almanac, ephemeris) - Ionospheric model - Time integrity

GPS MS

A-GPS server

GPS receivers reference network

1 9 54
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Assistance data gathered from a GPS reference network receiver is broadcast to the GPS MS. Flags/Parameters

EN_LCS = 1 EN_MS_BASED_AGPS enables/disables the positioning method MS Based A-GPS per CELL

0 = disabled; 1 = enabled; default = 0 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled; default = 0

EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS enables/disables the positioning method MS Assisted A-GPS per CELL

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 54

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: Assisted GPS Positioning [cont.]

A-GPS location procedure / MS Based A-GPS


MS BTS BSC Perform Location Request SMLC A-GPS Server

GPS info Request GPS info Response

Location Request
Assistance Data Assistance Data Acknowledge

Assistance Data
Positioning calculation: latitude, longitude and altitude

Position Request (X,Y) Position Response Location Response

Measurement Position Request

Measurement Position Response (X,Y)

(X,Y): computed position


1 9 55
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Perform Location Response (X,Y)

Using assistance data, the MS computes by itself the position and sends it back to the SMLC.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 55

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: Assisted GPS Positioning [cont.]

A-GPS location procedure / MS Assisted A-GPS


MS BTS BSC SMLC A-GPS Server

Perform Location Request

GPS info Request GPS info Response

Location Request
Assistance Data Assistance Data Acknowledge

Assistance Data
Pseudo-range measurements (M)

Position Request Position Response Location Response


(X,Y): computed position
1 9 56
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

Measurement Position Request

Measurement Position Response (M)

GPS Location Request (M) Perform Location Response (X,Y)


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

GPS Location Response (X,Y)

(X,Y)

Using a reduced set of assistance data, the MS makes pseudorange measurements and sends the result to the A-GPS server, which fixes the position in the end.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 56

5 LCS

LCS Impact on HO

HO preparation
Inhibition of better cell handovers Other HO
MS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR LCS client

LCS Service Request Send_Routing_Info request Send_Routing_Info response Provide_Subscriber_Location Paging Authentication + Ciphering BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request

Starts T_Location

BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Request

Emergency HO detection

BSSLAP - Reset

1 9 57
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

HO needed during LCS procedure

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 57

5 LCS

LCS Impact on HO [cont.]

HO management
Internal HO
MS BTS BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR LCS client

Intra BSC HO on going


BSSMAP Perform_Location_Request BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response BSSLAP - Reset

HO complete

BSSMAP perform location response (cause = "Intra-BSC Handover Complete)

1 9 58
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Mobile in communication

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 58

5 LCS

LCS Impact on HO [cont.]

HO management
External HO
MS BTS Serving BSC SMLC MSC GMLC HLR LCS client

External BSC HO

BSSMAP HO required

BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Abort BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response

BSSAP-LE Perform_Location_Response

1 9 59
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 59

5 LCS

BSS Parameters

FLAGS
EN_LCS EN_SAGI

OPTIMIZATION DATA
ARC_SIZE_FACTOR MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR

Timers
T_Location T_Location_longer T_Loc_Abort T_LCS_delay_tolerant T_LCS_LowDelay T_RRLP_low_delay T_RRLP_delay_tolerant

1 9 60
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

BSS PARAMETERS EN_LCS (BSC) Flag which enables or disables the LCS feature in the BSS. EN_SAGI Flag indicating whether SAGI is configured or not for this BSS. T_Location: BSC timer on a per call basis to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Request, when no RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. T_Location_longer: BSC timer on a per call basis to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Request, when an RRLP exchange is triggered with the MS. Replace T_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS-Assisted A-GPS, MS-Based A-GPS. T_Loc_Abort BSC timer to guard the response from the SMLC in case of Location Abort. T_LCS_LowDelay SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request. T_LCS_DelayTolerant SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Delay Tolerant Location Request. T_LCS_LowDelay SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including the RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a Low Delay Location Request. T_RRLP_Low_delay Timer to guard the RRLP exchange between the SMLC and the MS. T_RRLP_delay_tolerant Timer to guard the RRLP exchange between the SMLC and the MS. Optimization data: ARC_SIZE_FACTOR Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 60

5 LCS

Cell Parameters

FLAGS
EN_CONV_GPS EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS EN_MS_BASED_AGPS

SITE DATA
LCS_LATITUDE LCS_LONGITUDE LCS_SIGNIFICANT_GC LCS_AZIMUTH HALF_POWER_BANDWIDTH

1 9 61
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

CELL PARAMETERS EN_CONV_GPS Flag to enable/disable the Conventional GPS positioning method. EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS Flag to enable/disable the MS Assisted A-GPS positioning method. EN_MS_BASED_AGPS Flag to enable/disable the MS Based A-GPS positioning method. LCS_LATITUDE Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positioning method). LCS_LONGITUDE Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positioning method). LCS_SIGNIFICANT_GC Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not. LCS_AZIMUTH Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positioning method). HALF_POWER_BANDWIDTH Half power beam width of the antenna for the sector supporting the cell (used by the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positioning method). Remark: To have LCS supported for a cell, the operator must activate LCS on the BSS handling this cell but he must also activate GPRS for this cell (i.e. setting of MAX_PDCH to a value > 0, the cell being kept locked for GPRS if the operator does not want to have GPRS running on this cell) and configure all the required transmission resources (Ater and Gb resources) on the GPU(s) connected to this BSC.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 61

5 LCS

Positioning Methods: CI+TA Positioning

Ellipsoid arc definition:


Point (O)= serving BTS site coordinate = serving cell antenna azimuth - /2 =A*width of serving cell sector in [], calculated from bisector angles of co-sited antenna azimuths r1= inner radius of TA ring-(B-0.5)*554 in [m] R2=(B+C)*554 in [m]
A: ARC_SIZE_FACTOR B: MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR C: MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR
North

Point (O)

g vin Ser

r1 r2

ce ll ( CI)
S

1 9 62
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

An ellipsoid arc is a shape characterized by the co-ordinates of an ellipsoid point o (the origin), inner radius r1, uncertainty radius r2, both radii being geodesic distances over the surface of the ellipsoid, the offset angle () between the first defining radius of the ellipsoid arc and North, and the included angle () being the angle between the first and second defining radii. The offset angle is within the range of 0 to 359,999 while the included angle is within the range from 0,0001 to 360. This is to be able to describe a full circle, 0 to 360 For CI+TA method which is default one, the answer is given by description of "ellipsoid arc". Optimization parameters:

ARC_SIZE_FACTOR

Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method. Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based on TA positioning method.

MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR

MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 62

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

1 9 63
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 63

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

Purpose

SDCCH/8 time slots can be dynamically allocated on demand on a cellper-cell basis.


Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots Static SDCCH time slots

Allocated Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslots


Min

Max

TCH Capacity Static SDCCH timeslots

1 9 64
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

A Static SDCCH timeslot is a physical timeslot fixed allocated on the air interface. It contains 3, 4, 7 or 8 SDCCH sub-channels depending on whether the timeslot is an SDCCH/3, SDCCH/4, SDCCH/7, or SDCCH/8 timeslot.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 64

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

Principles

Principles
Too few SDCCH time slots could result in high blocking rate on SDCCH (Configuration 1) Too many SDCCH time slots could lead to a lack of TCH resources (Configuration 2)
Configuration 1 SDCCH time slots SDCCH time slots Configuration 2

TCH Capacity

TCH Capacity
TCH CAPACITY

Low signaling capacity More TCH capacity

High signaling capacity Less TCH capacity

1 9 65
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Definition An SDCCH is a logical SDCCH sub-channel mapped on a Static SDCCH timeslot or a Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot.

Signaling Load Cases Timeslot split between signaling and traffic channels depends on the network signaling load. The main cases are:

Normal signaling load cells:

Rural area cells in center of Location Areas (e.g. 1 SDCCH timeslot for a 3-TRX cell)

High signaling load cells:

Urban or suburban area cells in the center of a Location Area Rural area cells at the border of Location Areas (e.g. 2 SDCCH time slots for a 3-TRX cell)

Very high signaling load cells:

Urban or suburban area cells at the border of a Location Area Cells with high SMS load (more than one SMS per call) (e.g. 3 SDCCH time slots for a 3-TRX cell)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 65

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

Principles [cont.]

Allocation and de-allocation of Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots


An additional dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is allocated by the BSC if there is no SDCCH sub-channel free in the cell. A dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is de-allocated by the BSC after T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD (10s) delay if all of its SDCCH sub-channels become free

Allocation of Dynamic SDCCH/8 times slots

BCC: BCCH SDC : Static SDCCH SDD : Dynamic SDCCH

BCC BCC SDD TCH


Cell

SDC SDC TCH TCH


TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

TCH TCH TCH

SDD TCH TCH

1 9 66
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The location of the Dynamic SDCCH/8 time slots are fixed by O&M configuration.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 66

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

Timeslot Types

NEW TIMESLOT TYPES:


SDCCH Pure SDCCH or static SDCCH TCH Pure TCH TCH/SDCCH dynamic SDCCH TCH/SPDCH MPDCH

1 9 67
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The OMC-R provides the BSC with the following O&M type of radio timeslots:

Main BCCH timeslot (BCC): It is a timeslot carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH. Main combined BCCH timeslot (CBC): It is a timeslot carrying FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH/4 + SACCH/4. Static SDCCH timeslot (SDC): It is a timeslot carrying SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8. Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (SDD): It is a timeslot carrying TCH + SACCH or SDCCH/8 + SACCH/8. TCH timeslot (TCH): It is a timeslot carrying TCH + SACCH or PDCH.

From RAM point of view, a radio timeslot can be defined as:


Pure BCCH timeslot: The BCCH timeslot is the radio timeslot configured as BCC by O&M. Such a timeslot only carries common CS signaling. Pure SDCCH timeslot: A pure SDCCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as a CBC or SDC by O&M. Such a timeslot can carry SDCCH traffic.

Pure TCH timeslot: A pure TCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot only carries TCH traffic.

TCH/SDCCH timeslot: A TCH/SDCCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as SDD by O&M. Such a timeslot is dynamically allocated as TCH or as SDCCH depending on the usage of the timeslot. It can carry TCH traffic or SDCCH traffic.

TCH/SPDCH timeslot: A TCH/SPDCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot is dynamically allocated as TCH or as SPDCH depending on the usage of the timeslot. It can carry TCH traffic or PS traffic.

MPDCH timeslot: A MPDCH timeslot is a timeslot configured as TCH by O&M. Such a timeslot can only carry common PS signaling. A pure SDCCH timeslot can carry x SDCCH sub-channels where x equal to: 4 in case of combined CCCH and when CBCH is not configured on the timeslot, 7 in case of non-combined CCCH and when CBCH is configured on the timeslot, 3 in case of combined CCCH and when CBCH is configured on the timeslot, 8 for a normal SDCCH timeslot.

When allocated as SDCCH, a TCH/SDCCH timeslot can carry up to 8 SDCCH sub-channels.


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 67

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

Allocation Algorithms

SDCCH Request

SDCCH mapped on "TCU very high load state" removal

Yes

No

Are they any free SDCCH sub-channel among Static SDCCH timeslots?

Selection of one SDCCH sub-channel

Yes

No

Are they any free SDCCH sub-channel among Dynamic SDCCH/8 already allocated? Selection one SDCCH sub-channel
Yes

No

Are they any Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslots available and free in the cell? Allocate one Dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot

SDCCH Request rejected!!!

1 9 68
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Principle 1: Preference is given to pure SDCCH timeslots Principle 2: Balance TCU processor load between different TCUs In fact before entering in this algorithm (see slide) the first step is: Removal of all the SDCCH subchannels mapped on TCU in Very High Overload state. Principle 3: FR TRX preference

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 68

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

SDCCH Sub-Channel Selection

Pure SDCCH Timeslot


TS with LOWEST TCU LOAD TS with MAXIMUM FREE SDCCH Sub channels TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_ID

TCH/SDCCH TS allocated as SDCCH


TS on FR TRX TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_ID

TCH/SDCCH TS allocated as TCH


TS with LOWEST TCU LOAD TS on FR TRX TS with lowest index on TRX with lowest TRX_ID

1 9 69
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Note that a SDCCH request cannot access the timeslots reserved by NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO. If all remaining TCH/SDCCH timeslots are reserved by NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO, then the SDCCH request shall be rejected.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 69

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

De-Allocation Algorithm

GENERAL CASE:
all SDCCH sub-channels of a TCH/SDCCH timeslot become back free. the T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD timer (10s, not tunable) is started. If the timeslot is still free of SDCCH sub-channel when the timer expires, it is de-allocated (it becomes back TCH).

SPECIAL CASE:
Several TCH/SDCCH timeslots are allocated as SDCCH One of them becomes free of SDCCH sub-channels. Its timer starts. A subsequent one becomes free of SDCCH sub-channels too before expiration of the first ones timer (10s). One of them is immediately de-allocated (the one with lowest priority: see previous slide in reverse order) and becomes back TCH. For the last one, its timer is restarted (it will be de-allocated in 10s).

1 9 70
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

The de-allocation algorithm ensures that:


TCH/SDCCH timeslots are not allocated too fast to TCH after de-allocating them TCH/SDCCH timeslots are not re-allocated too frequently to SDCCH Note: while T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is running:

the dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot marked as HOLD is still considered as allocated to SDCCH (and cannot be allocated to TCH).

If a subsequent dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot (used as SDCCH and in the same cell) becomes free:

If this just freed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot has a higher priority, T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is re-started and precedent dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot in HOLD state is de-allocated immediately. If this just freed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot has lower priority, and T_DYN_SDCCH_HOLD is re-started and the just freed dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot is de-allocated immediately.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 70

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

O&M Configuration

Selection of static or dynamic SDCCH


Timeslot configuration menu

Massive modification by script


10 templates Template customization Template launched through PRC
10 3 2
BTS BTS

5 8
BTS

1 7 9
BTS

11 6

12

1 9 71
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Dynamic SDCCH Rules


The CBCH must be configured on a static SDCCH/8 or SDCCH/4 timeslot. Combined SDCCHs (SDCCH/4 + BCCH) are always static.

To avoid incoherent allocation strategy between SDCCH and PDCH, a dynamic SDCCH/8 timeslot cannot have the characteristic of being a PDCH (it cannot carry GPRS traffic). The operator must configure at least one static SDCCH/8 or SDCCH/4 timeslot on BCCH TRX in a cell.

In cells with E-GSM, only the TRX, which do not belong to the G1 band, can support dynamic and static SDCCHs.

In multiband and concentric cells, only the TRX, which belongs to the outer zone, can support dynamic and static SDCCHs. Up to 24 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels can be configured per TRX.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 71

6 Dynamic SDCCH Allocation

O&M Configuration [cont.]

Default configuration for a cell which has only Full rate TRX
Number of TRX in the cell 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Number of Static SDCCH 4 4 8 8 8 8 8 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 24 24 24 Number of Dynamic SDCCH 8 8 16 16 24 24 24 24 24 32 32 32 40 40 40 48 48 Total number of SDCCH 12 12 24 24 32 32 32 40 40 48 48 48 56 56 64 72 72 Maximum SDCCH/TRX ratio 12.0 (note 1) 6.0 12.0 8.0 8.0 6.4 5.3 5.7 5.0 5.3 4.8 4.4 4.7 4.3 4.6 4.8 4.5 Is BCCH/CCCH combined with SDCCH? Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

1 9 72
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Note1: For one TRX, dynamic SDCCHs are over-dimensioned because of the granularity of 8. According to the Alcatel-Lucent traffic model, all dynamic SDCCHs will not be used. Note2: An additional dynamic SDCCH/8 must be provided for each DR TRX (these are expected mainly on small cells). Rules:

At least one static SDCCH/4 or SDCCH/8 on BCCH TRX. Up to 24 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per TRX. Up to 32 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per TCU. Up to 88 static/dynamic SDCCH sub-channels per CELL.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 72

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

1 9 73
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 73

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Algorithms

Emergency handovers specific to concentric cells


Intracell handovers from inner to outer zone cause 10: too low level on the uplink in inner zone cause 11: too low level on the downlink in inner zone

May be triggered From inner zone of a concentric cell Towards outer zone, same cell

n Co

c e n tric c e ll

ne

r zon

O ute

r zone

1 9 74
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 74

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 10

CAUSE 10: too low level on the uplink in the inner zone
AV_RXLEV_UL_HO < RXLEV_UL_ZONE MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)

and

Averaging window: A_LEV_HO

1 9 75
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 75

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 11

CAUSE 11: too low level on the downlink in the inner zone
AV_RXLEV_DL_HO < RXLEV_DL_ZONE BS_TXPWR = BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER

and

Averaging window: A_LEV_HO

1 9 76
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 76

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13

CAUSE 13: too high level on UL and DL in the outer zone


Better condition intracell handover If the cell is a multi-band cell, cause 13 is checked only for multi-band MSs

May be triggered
From outer zone of a concentric cell Towards inner zone, same cell

Co

nce

n tri c c el

ne

r zon

Oute

r zone

1 9 77
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 77

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13 [cont.]

CAUSE 13: too high level on UL and DL in the outer zone


AV_RXLEV_UL_HO > RXLEV_UL_ZONE + + ZONE_HO_HYST_UL + + (MS_TXPWR MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) + + PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref) and AV_RXLEV_DL_HO > RXLEV_DL_ZONE + + ZONE_HO_HYST_DL + + (BS_TXPWR BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) + + PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref) and AV_RXLEV_NCELL_BIS(n) <= neighbour_RXLEV(0,n) and EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE (B7) and EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO = ENABLE Averaging windows: A_LEV_HO and A_PBGT_HO (for n)

1 9 78
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 78

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13 [cont.]

ZONE_HO_HYST_UL
UL static hysteresis for interzone HO from outer to inner
In case of multi-band cell, should take into account the difference of propagation between GSM and DCS

Added to cause 10 threshold RXLEV_UL_ZONE

ZONE_HO_HYST_DL
DL static hysteresis for interzone HO from outer to inner
In case of multi-band cell, should take into account the difference of propagation between GSM and DCS and the difference of BTS transmission power in the two bands

Added to cause 11 threshold RXLEV_DL_ZONE

1 9 79
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 79

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13 [cont.]

PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref)
Penalty PING_PONG_HCP put on cause 13 if
The immediately preceding zone in which the call has been is the inner zone of the serving cell And The last handover was not external intracell And T_HCP is still running

PING_PONG_MARGIN(0,call_ref) = 0
If the call was not previously in servings inner zone Or T_HCP has expired

n Co

c e n tric c e ll

ne

r zon

O ute
1 9 80
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

r zone

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 80

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13 [cont.]

neighbour_RXLEV(0,n)
Inner zone interferer 1

I n n er z o n e

Inner zone interferer 2

?
Concentric cells are designed to create an INNER zone
protected from external interferers and creating no interferences on other cells to be able to face more aggressive frequency reuse in INNER zone TRXs
C o n c e n tr i c c e ll
Outer zone

neighbour_RXLEV(0,n) tuning enables to avoid handovers if the MS position will lead to interferences the condition is checked towards all neighbor cells belonging to the same layer and band as the serving cell

1 9 81
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 81

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Handover Algorithm Cause 13 [cont.]

EN_CAUSE_13
Load balance between inner and outer zones may be allowed by setting EN_LOAD_BALANCE = ENABLE If EN_LOAD_BALANCE = ENABLE
If INNER zone is less loaded than OUTER, EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE If INNER zone is more loaded than OUTER, EN_CAUSE_13 = DISABLE

If EN_LOAD_BALANCE = DISABLE
EN_CAUSE_13 = ENABLE

1 9 82
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 82

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Outgoing Intercell Handovers from Concentric Cell

Outgoing intercell handovers from concentric cells


As explained here before, the MS located in a concentric cell can make intercell, emergency or better condition HO regardless their current zone
For example, an MS located in the INNER zone of a concentric cell can make directly an HO cause 12 towards another cell, WITHOUT having to trigger any cause 10 or 11 to the OUTER zone before.
I n n er z o n e

I n n er z o n e

C o n c e n t r ic c e l l
I n n er z o n e

Outer zone

C o n c e n t r ic c e l l

Outer zone

C o n c e n t r ic c e l l
1 9 83
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Outer zone

The only restrictions are linked to EN_MULTI-BAND_PBGT_HO and EN_BI-BAND_MS parameters.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 83

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Incoming Intercell Handovers from Concentric Cell

Incoming intercell handovers towards a concentric cell


In case an MS makes an incoming handover towards a concentric cell (due to outer PBGT measurements,etc.), a TCH may be allocated
either in the INNER or in the OUTER zone, as for call setup depending on radio conditions

In case of a multi-band cell, if the MS is not multi-band, it will always be sent to the OUTER zone

I n n er zo n e

? ?
C el l

C o n c e n t ric c el l
1 9 84
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Outer zone

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 84

7 Handover Detection for Concentric Cells

Incoming Intercell Handovers from Concentric Cell [cont.]


Use part of Handover cause 13 algorithm on each potential target IF Cell(n) is external
The MS is directed to the OUTER zone of (n)

ELSE (cell(n) is internal)


IF AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEV_DL_ZONE + ZONE_HO_HYST_DL + + (BS_TXPWR - BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO = ENABLE

and

The MS is directed towards the INNER zone ELSE The MS is directed towards the OUTER zone

1 9 85
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 85

Self-assessment on the Objectives

Please be reminded to fill in the form Self-Assessment on the Objectives for this module The form can be found in the first part of this course documentation

1 9 86
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 86

End of Module Annexes

1 9 87
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Annexes GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12209AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 9 Page 87

Do not delete this graphic elements in here:

Section 1 B11 Radio Fine Tuning


3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1

Module 10 Solutions

GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction TMO18097 D0 SG DEN I1.0 Issue 1

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 1

1 Exercises solution

1 10 2
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 2

1 Exercises solution

1.1 Typical radio Problems


Unbalanced Power Budget High ratio of UL QUAL HO cause Good RXLEV and Bad RXQUAL Alarm VWSR (OMC-R)
(Voltage Standing Wave Ratio)

Bad Coverage

Interferences

TCH Congestion

Bad RXLEV and Bad RXQUAL High Path-loss difference between UL and DL Low incoming HO success rate OMC QOS indicators: % TCH failure high % call drop high % QUAL HO % call drop
1 10 3
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

DL>UL TCH Congestion rate Path loss VWSR UL Qual HO No network Low prop Better cell High % DL Qual HO Low HO success rate DL/UL Qual HO Interference HO Adjacent Co-channel

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 3

1 Exercises solution

1.2 MS Re-selection Algorithms

Important Parameters
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN [dBm]
-103dBm for G3
CI=1823 GSM900 CI=6271 GSM900

Cell (8557, 1823)


CI=6270 GSM900

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH [dBm]
33dBm

CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET
0 dB

TEMPORARY_OFFSET
0 dB

PENALTY_TIME
0s

CI=6169 GSM900

CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS
6dB

Cell (8564,6169)

CI=1964 GSM900

Cell (8564, 1964)

1 10 4
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 4

1 Exercises solution

1.2 MS Re-selection Algorithms [cont.]

Find the selected cell by MS?


CI=1823 GSM900

CI=6271 GSM900

Cell 3 (8557, 1823)


CI=6270 GSM900

Measurements 1 2 3 4 5

RxLev (1)

RxLev (2)

RxLev (3)

-80 -84 -88 -88 -89

-96 -90 -90 -87 -85

-104 -100 -87 -82 -78


CI=6169 GSM900

LU

Cell 2 (8564,6169)

CI=1964 GSM900

Cell 1 (8564, 1964)

1 10 5
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Case 5: LU because cell_reselect_hysteresis = 6dB C2=-78dB > -85 + 6 = -79 dB (the best one!)

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 5

1 Exercises solution

1.3 Measurements Principle

The risk is that the correspondence table implemented at OMC is wrong and a distant cell with the same (BSIC, BCCH) couple can be seen as the cell associated to the measurement results. The BSC can trigger a HO toward this cell whereas the measurements are not the target cell measurements. OR 2 (BSIC, BCCH) couple are identical or similar : (BSICn, BCCHn) = (BSICm, BCCHm). The BSC can decode (BSICn, BCCHn) as (LACm, CIm) and trigger an HO toward the wrong cell.

1 10 6
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 6

1 Exercises solution

1.4 Measurements Averaging

1 10 7
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 7

mk1

1 Exercises solution

1.5 Radio Link Supervision

1 10 8
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 8

Slide 8 mk1
Moctar KARIDJO; 21/04/2009

1 Exercises solution

1.6 Power Control

RxQual
2
1 2 3 5

3
6 4

-90
Nb of case ---> AV_RXQUAL_UL_PC AV_RXLEV_UL_PC Power control MS_P_INC or RED 10dB 1 0 -98

-86
2 1 -80 3 2 -73 4 6 -69

-75
5 3 -86

Lev
6 4 -90

4dB

6dB

6dB

6dB

1 10 9
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 9

1 Exercises solution

1.6 Power Control [cont.]


Using the Trace Abis Excel file, find each parameter value : POW_INC_STEP_SIZE = 6 dB BS_P_CON_INT = 1s POW_RED_STEP_SIZE = 2 dB OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH = 1 Which phenomenon can you observe as regards the successive PC commands ?
We can observe a PC ping-pong effect

A increase PC command is triggered because of bad quality and just after a decrease PC command is triggered because of too good level

Most of samples present bad RxQual with good RxLev Solution : tune L_RXLEV_DL_P and U_RXLEV_DL_P

1 10 10
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 10

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection

Emergency causes HO Cause 2 Recall : AV_RXQUAL_UL_HO > L_RXQUAL_UL_H + OFFSET_RXQUAL_FH and AV_RXLEV_UL_HO <= RXLEV_UL_IH and MS_TXPWR = min (P, MS_TXPWR_MAX)

1 10 11
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 11

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Emergency causes Complete the diagram then fill in the chart:

N b o f c a se - - - > A V _RXQ U A L_U L_HO A V _RXLEV_U L_HO Power m ax of M S H O c a u se 2 : Y E S / N O ?

1 4 - 81 33 YES

2 1 - 79 33 NO

3 3 - 75 33 NO

4 4 - 70 33 YES

5 4 - 69 33 NO

6 4 - 72 29 (0,8 w ) W AIT PC

QUAL

3 -70
1 10 12
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

LEV

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 12

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Better condition causes Recall PBGT(n) = AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) - AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO


- (BS_TXPWR_MAX AV_BS_TXPWR_HO) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n) MS_TXPWR_MAX) - PING_PONG_MARGIN(n, call_ref)

1 10 13
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 13

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


condition causes (simple case) What does it mean if there is only 2W cells c=0 What happens if DL_PWC is disabled b=0 No Ping-Pong margin d=0 HO_MARGIN(0,n)=5 dbm Fill in the chart:
Nb of case ---> AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO PBGT(n) a only HO cause 12: YES/ NO ? PBGT > HO margin 1 - 70 - 80 10 YES 2 - 70 - 70 0 NO 3 - 80 - 75 -5 NO 4 - 70 - 75 5 NO

Better

Ncell Serving cell

5 - 70 - 79 6 YES

6 - 75 - 96 21 YES

1 10 14
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 14

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Better

condition causes (ping-pong case) EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)=Disable Ping-Pong margin


PING_PONG_HCP=15db T_HCP =10s
HO_MARGIN(0,n)=5 Serving cell

Ncell

dB A_PBGT_HO = 8 SACCH A n to 0 HO has been triggered, what happens after 4s?


N b o f ca se - - - > A V _ RXLEV _N C ELL(n ) A V _ RXLEV _PBG T_H O PBG T(n ) a o n l y H O ca u se 1 2 : Y ES/ N O ? P B G T > H O m a rg in PI N G _PO N G _ H C P= 1 5 H O ca u se 1 2 : Y ES/ N O ? 1 - 70 - 80 10 YES -5 NO 2 - 70 - 70 0 NO -15 NO 3 - 80 - 75 - 5 NO -20 NO 4 - 70 - 75 5 NO -10 NO 5 - 70 - 79 9 YES -6 NO 6 - 75 - 96 21 YES 6 YES

1 10 15
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 15

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Better condition causes (traffic case) Fill in the chart:


Number of case AV_RXLEV_NCELL(n) AV_RXLEV_PBGT_HO Traffic distribution

1
-71 dBm -80 dBm 0: tr low N: tr high 9 dB 5dB NO NO

2
-71 dBm -80 dBm 0: tr high N: tr low 9dB -5dB YES YES

3
-76 dBm -80 dBm 0: tr high N: tr low 4dB -5dB NO YES

4
-71 dBm -80 dBm 0: tr low N: tr low 9dB 0dB YES NO

PBGT(n) DELTA_HO_MARGIN(0,n) Cause 12 HO: YES/NO? Cause 23 HO: YES/NO?

1 10 16
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 16

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Channel adaptation (cause 26 and cause 27)


Find the thresholds and offsets for normal and high load :

THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL = 0 OFFSET_CA_NORMAL = 0 THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH = 2 OFFSET_CA_HIGH = 1 Use the previous thresholds and fill up the chart :

UL_QUAL DL_QUAL LOAD_SV3 AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_HR_FR AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_HR_FR AV_RXQUAL_UL_CA_FR_HR AV_RXQUAL_DL_CA_FR_HR CHANNEL TYPE

0 1 2 3 0 0 1 1 false false false false 0,5 1,5 2,5 0 0,5 1 1,5 0,5 FR FR

3 1 true 3 1 2,3 0,8 FR

1 0 true 2 0,5 2,3 0,8 FR

1 0 true 1 0 2 0,5 HR

0 2 true 0,5 1 1,3 0,8 HR

0 4 true 0 3 0,5 1,5 HR

1 3 true 0,5 3,5 0,5 2,3 FR

1 10 17
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 17

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]


Traffic HO (cause 28) Find the appropriate candidate MS for this queued request :
Fast

MS 1 2 3

Neighbors

1 -82 -79 -90

2 -85 -86 -82

3 -78 -92 -89

1 10 18
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 18

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after call set-up


Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_NOT_FORCED
Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : EFR/FR

After call set-up After TFO negotiation

TCH = HR
TFO ON

TCH = EFR TCH = EFR


MS can use HR/EFR/FR

TCH = EFR

EFR
1 10 19
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MS can use EFR/FR


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

EFR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 19

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after call set-up


Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY
Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : EFR/FR

After call set-up After TFO negotiation

TCH = HR
TFO OFF

TCH = EFR TCH = EFR


MS can use HR

TCH = HR

HR
1 10 20
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MS can use EFR/FR


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

EFR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 20

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after call set-up


Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_PREFERRED
Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : EFR/FR

After call set-up After TFO negotiation

TCH = HR
TFO ON

TCH = EFR TCH = EFR


MS can use HR MS can use EFR/FR

TCH = EFR

EFR
1 10 21
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MS can use HR/EFR/FR


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

EFR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 21

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after call set-up


Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY
Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

After call set-up After TFO negotiation

TCH = HR
TFO ON

TCH = EFR TCH = HR


MS can use HR

TCH = HR

HR
1 10 22
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

MS can use HR/EFR/FR


All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

HR

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 22

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after handover


Find the 2 speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY
Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

KEEP_CODEC_HO = FREE
MS2 MS2 HO EFR then HR with TFO negociation

Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

call set-up + TFO negociation HR TFO ON

HR MS1
1 10 23
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TFO ON

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 23

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after handover


Find the speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY
Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

KEEP_CODEC_HO = TFO_CALLS_ONLY
MS2 MS2 HO HR without TFO negotiation

Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

call set-up + TFO negotiation HR TFO ON

HR MS1
1 10 24
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TFO ON

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 24

1 Exercises solution

1.7 HO Detection [cont.]

TFO HO (cause 29) : after handover


Find the speech version types of the following MS to MS call EN_TFO = enable, EN_TFO_MATCH = enable FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED = TFO_HR_ONLY Unloaded cell KEEP_CODEC_HO = TFO_CALLS_ONLY
MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR Loaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR
EN_TFO_OPT = enable
MS2 MS2 HO EFR after HR TFO after optimisation HO

Unloaded cell MS / cell cap : HR/EFR/FR

call set-up + TFO negociation HR TFO ON

EFR HR MS1
1 10 25
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

TFO ON

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 25

1 Exercises solution

1.8 HO candidate cells Evaluation

Emergency HO detected
With the Candidate evaluation.xls excel sheet...
Filtering simulation for a list of candidate cell Ranking simulation for a list of candidate cell

11 10 26
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

Book-keeping list
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 26

1 Exercises solution

1.8 HO candidate cells Evaluation [cont.]

Emergency HO detected

2-

Averaging measurement

34-

PBGT Filtering

GRADE evaluation process

5-

Target Cell

1 10 27
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 27

1 Exercises solution

1.9 Algorithms Dynamic Behavior

According to the Abis results and some parameters already set,


tune qualitatively the sliding averaging windows:
A_QUAL_HO A_LEV_HO Level at RxQual=3 L_RXLEV_DL_H A_QUAL_HO A_LEV_HO -80dBm -85dBm 6 2 -96dBm -90dBm 4 6 -90dBm -90dBm 6 4

1 10 28
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

1st Case:

The DL level HO is triggered whereas the quality is already bad (at 80dB, rxQual=3!) If the sliding averaging window has been set to 6 for quality causes, the sliding averaging window for level causes has to be accelerated; So, A_LEV_HO = 2. BUT A_QUAL_HO and L_RXLEV_DL_H are very badly tuned !

2nd Case:

The DL level HO is triggered whereas the quality is good If the sliding averaging window has been set to 4 for quality causes, the sliding averaging window for level causes can be slowed down; So, A_LEV_HO = 6.

3rd Case:

The DL level HO is triggered whereas the quality starts being degraded If the sliding averaging window has been set to 4 for level causes, the sliding averaging window for quality causes can not be slowed down anyway. The purpose is not to perform a level handover in place of quality one. Aim is to avoid bad quality calls. So, A_QUAL_HO = 4 or 6

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 28

1 Exercises solution

1.9 Algorithms Dynamic Behavior [cont.]

Training exercise (1)


Solution

Loaded cell 0

Unloaded cell n

Cause 12 PBGT(n) = -1

Cause 23

Cause 12

PBGT(0) = 9

New traffic for cell n

EN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1

PBGT(0) = 5

PBGT(n) = 5

1 10 29
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 29

1 Exercises solution

1.9 Algorithms Dynamic Behavior [cont.]

Training exercise (2)


HO Ping-Pong effect

Unloaded cell n PBGT(0)=PBGT(n)=0

Cause 28 Queued Ass Req Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82dBm

Av_Rxlev_Ncell(0) = -74dBm Av_Rxlev_PBGT_HO = -82dBm

Cause 12 PBGT(0) = 5

L_RLEV_NCELL_DR(n) = -85dBm PBGT(n) = 5

1 10 30
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

First, a HO cause 28 is triggered from cell 0 to cell n because : - AV_RxLev_Ncell(n) > L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n) -82dBm > -85dBm - and because cell n is unloaded, we assume that t(n) > FREE_LEVEL_DR(n) Just after, a HO cause 12 is triggered from cell n to cell 0 because : - PBGT(0) > HO_MARGIN(n,0) AV_Rxlev_Ncell(0) AV_Rxlev_PBGT_HO > HO_MARGIN(n,0) -74dBm -82dBm > 5dB 8dB > 5dB

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 30

1 Exercises solution

1.9 Algorithms Dynamic Behavior [cont.]

Training exercise (3)


When FAST_TRAFFIC_HO is enabled, activate HO CAUSE 23, it represents a good means to avoid ping-pong effect

Loaded cell 0

Unloaded cell n

Queued Ass Req Cause 28 Av_Rxlev_Ncell(n) = -82 Av_Rxlev(0) = -74 PBGT(0) = 9 PBGT(n) = -1 PBGT(0) = 5
1 10 31
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

In this case, no ping-pong effect because : PBGT(0) = 8dB is not higher than HO_MARGIN(n,0) + DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN (=5dB + 4dB). The triggering of HO cause 12 from cell n to cell 0 is delayed because the cell 0 is loaded and the cell n is unloaded.

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 31

1 Exercises solution

1.10 TCH Resources Allocation


A non hopping cell is configured on the OMC-R TRX_PREF_MARK 0 1 2 3 4

5
TCH TCH

6
TCH TCH

7
TCH TCH

0 0 0 1

TRX1 TRX2

BCC SDD SDC

TCH TCH

SDC SDC

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TRX3 TRX4

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

TCH TCH

Find the radio TS configuration in RAM if NB_TS_MPDCH= 0


PBC: Pure BCCH PSD: Pure SDCCH TSD: TCH/SDCCH TSP: TCH/SPDCH MPD: MPDCH PTC: Pure TCH
1 10 32
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4

PBC SDC TSD TSP PTC

TSP PTC TSP PTC

PSD PSD TSP PTC

TSP TSP TSP PTC

TSP TSP TSP PTC

TSP TSP TSP PTC

TSP TSP TSP PTC

TSP TSP TSP PTC

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 32

1 Exercises solution

1.10 TCH Resources Allocation [cont.]

A cell is configured on the OMC-R and TRE are mapped by BSS 0


0 0 1 0 1
TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 BCC SDD SDC SDC TCH TCH

TRX_PREF_MARK

1
SDC TCH TCH TCH TCH

2
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

3
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

4
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

5
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

6
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

7
TCH TCH TCH TCH TCH

TRE G4 MP FR G4 MP DR G3 DR G4 MP FR G3 DR

1 10 33
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 33

1 Exercises solution

1.10 TCH Resources Allocation [cont.]

Find the radio TS configuration in RAM if NB_TS_MPDCH= 0


Pure BCCH TS Pure SDCCH TS TCH/SDDCH TS PBC PSD TSD PTC TSP MPD Pure TCH TS TCH/SPDCH TS MPDCH

TRX_PREF_MARK

0
0 0 1 0 1
TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 PBC SDC TSD PSD TSP PTC

1
PSD TSP PTC TSP PTC

2
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

3
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

4
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

5
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

6
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

7
TSP TSP PTC TSP PTC

TRE G4 MP FR G4 MP DR G3 DR G4 MP FR G3 DR

1 10 34
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 34

1 Exercises solution

1.10 TCH Resources Allocation [cont.]

Find which TCH sub-channel is allocated:


1. For MS1: E-GSM, DR 2. For MS2: GSM/DCS, DR 3. For MS3: GSM, FR 4. For MS4, MS5, ., MSn: E-GSM, DR n = 16

Pure TCH TS TCH/SPDCH TS

TCH/SDDCH TS as TCH TS P: SPDCH TS F: FR TCH call H: HR TCH call Cell load = true

TRX Rank

0
TRX1 TRX2 TRX3 TRX4 TRX5 H P H H

1
13

3
12

4
P P F P

5
P

6
P H 2 P H F H

7
3 9 8
F F 14 H

TRE GSM/FR GSM/DR GSM/DR GSM/FR G1/DR

2 3 1 1 10 35

15 16

P F P H

P F P

P F P

10 11
F P

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 35

2 Case Studies solution

1 10 36
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 36

2 Case Studies solution

2.1 Tunnel Case


Radiating cable in a tunnel Question:


Risks of such a configuration : The pedestrian mobile receives a good level from the tunnel BTS (unfortunately, the propagation is not confined in the tunnel). The propagation conditions are very hard to predict and the risk is a conflict in the serving area (in RNP) of the outdoor BTS.

Tune the right parameters for the tunnel cell


Catch quickly car traffic Avoid the pedestrian traffic
Indoor BTS

HO_margin (outdoor, tunnel) = -5 dB (car arriving fast, no Ping-Pong) HO_margin (tunnel, outdoor) = 5 dB To avoid ping-pong HO when pedestrian mobile are close to the tunnel, the anti ping-pong mechanism has to be activated: And Ping_Pong_Margin =50 dB and T_HCP =60s Eventually speed-up averaging process in tunnel cell in order to secure HO when going out of the tunnel (decrease of A_QUAL_HO, A_LEV_HO, A_PBGT_HO).
1 10 37
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

O utdoor BTS Pedestrian m obile

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 37

2 Case Studies solution

2.2 Radar Case

Radar situation
A radar cell situated on top of a hill provides a wide coverage area. An industrial zone in the valley is covered by small cells but also by the radar cell. The serving areas in the IZ are not clearly defined.

Objective
Give a parameter set to prevent the radar cell from catching any traffic in the industrial zone by HO assignment

When a HO is triggered in an industrial zone cell, we have to encourage other IZ cells and discourage the radar cell in the candidate cell evaluation process. The pre-ranking procedure is the most adapted to satisfy those requirements. By setting the PRIORITY(0,N) from any IZ cell to the radar cell to 1 whereas it is set to 0 for every IZ couple, the target list will favour the IZ cell face to the radar cell. PRIORITY(IZ Cell, Radar Cell) = 1 PRIORITY(IZ Cell, IZ Cell) = 0 In idle mode use C2 criteria on cell reselection.

1 10 38
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

A multilayer architecture can also be used in this case (IZ set as MINI, Radar as UMBRELLA). Cause 14 activated to capture traffic from Radar to IZ. FDR in case of congestion. To stick to single layer architecture, to grab more traffic in IZ cells, Cause 24 (general capture) can be used from Radar to IZ. In the other way (IZ to Radar), PBGT will be disabled by setting HO_MARGIN to +127dB

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 38

2 Case Studies solution

2.3 Tower Case


Tower

situation

The indoor mobile selects in idle mode the outdoor cell (same LA)
Objective

Define a set of parameters to avoid that effect

Indoor antenna

The question is : would we rather advantage the indoor cell or disadvantage the outdoor one ? As the parameter CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET is not Indoor set on a cell couple basis but on a cell basis, if mobile we disadvantage the outdoor one, it will be O u tdo o r c ell disadvantaged in regard to the other outdoor cells. This is not the purpose. In connected mode we can favor the Wed rather advantage the indoor cell. indoor cell by : increasing the HO margin from In Idle mode, the set of parameters is then: indoor to outdoor cells CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET = 10 dB - enable distance HO when TEMPORARY_OFFSET = 20 dB connected to far outdoor cells PENALTY_TIME = 1 (20s = minimum, we need Another idea is to put this cell in PENALTY_TIME different from 31 ) INDOOR layer , behaviour like microcell
1 10 39
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

Advantaging the indoor cell means: increase artificially its C2 criterion. We have to introduce a temporary component to increase the C2 C2=C1+ CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET If there is no temporary component, the C2 is disadvantaged: C2=C1- CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 39

2 Case Studies solution

2.4 Resurgence Case

Resurgence situation
In rural network, especially in hilly landscape, many resurgences occur from very far cells.
25 Km

C e ll A

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid radio link establishment to those cells and TCH traffic on those cells
C e ll B

from cell A To avoid SDCCH connection to this cell: Apply RACH filtering procedure in cell A: RACH_TA_FILTER = 40 (d >> 22km. TA =1 => d =553m) C2 criteria on cell reselection is less easy to tune and can have side effects on surrounding cells reselection. To avoid TCH traffic on this cell: Use Cause 6 HO in cell A: A_RANGE_HO = 6 ; U_TIME_ADVANCE = 40 (d >> 22km. TA =1 => d =553m) Risk of PING_PONG HO if the resurgence is strong: activate the anti ping-pong mechanism... Note : RACH_TA_FILTER is anyway a bad mechanism. If resurgence of cell A corresponds to a coverage hole of cell B, due to RACH_TA_FILTER, no call will be possible anymore in this zone

R esurg ence

1 10 40
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 40

2 Case Studies solution

2.5 Forest Case

Forest situation: a highway crosses a forest


High call drop rate (radio cause) on the cell and drive tests: strong level attenuation at the entrance of the forest

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid radio link failure
Forest (ATT = 10 dB every 100 m)

The parameters to set are the Radio Link Supervision parameters: Radio_Link_Timeout_BS = 68 Radio_Link_Timeout = 64 En_RL_Recov = Enable

-90 dBm

-75 dBm

Hi

gh

wa

BTS

1 10 41
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 41

2 Case Studies solution

2.6 Highway Case

Highway situation:
A highway is slightly covered (best coverage on 200m) by an orthogonal cell (cell C on the map)

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid traffic in the orthogonal cell
The problem involve the pre-ranking and the ORDER/GRADE evaluation processes. First, Case 1: a mobile is connected to cell A (car in the highway): When the BSC detected a HO, cell B must be advantaged compared to cell C (the small village BTS). Pre-ranking: Priority (A, B) = 0 Priority (A, C) = 1 Case 2: a mobile is connected to cell B (car in the highway): When the BSC detected a HO, cell A must be advantaged compared to cell C (the small village BTS). Pre-ranking: Priority (B, A) = 0 Priority (B, C) = 1 Case 3: a mobile is connected to cell C (pedestrian mobile in the village): The BSC must avoid as far as possible to handover the pedestrian mobile to cell A or B. Action can be done for better condition HO only (!) HO detection and PBGT filtering HO_MARGIN (C,A) and HO_MARGIN (C,B) up to 10 dB

1 10 42
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 42

2 Case Studies solution

2.7 TCH/SDCCH Congestion Case

SDCCH congestion situation


A railway station is located at the frontier of two LAs. Every train stopping in this station comes from LA 1 and then returns to LA 1 after the stop.

Objective
Define a set of parameters to avoid SDCCH congestion on cell B (LA 2)

Avoid the LU for all the travellers mobile. C2 criterion is directly concerned by this objective. If you disadvantage re-selection from one cell to another belonging to a different location area you will avoid inopportune Location Update. The parameter to tune is CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET ON CELL B. To define the right value, an Abis trace has to be performed. Lets define CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET= 20 dB on cell B. (And PENALTY_TIME = 31)

Cell B
LA 2

LA 1

Cell A

LA

fro nti er

1 10 43
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 43

2 Case Studies solution

2.8 Indoor Cell Congestion Case

An indoor microcell has been introduced within a multi-layer network (macro + micro) When the indoor microcell is congested, FDR may not be working as some the MSs can be covered only by this cell
Define parameter settings to find a good solution in case of indoor cell congestion

Macro-Cell

Macro-Cell

Macro-Cell

Micro-cells

Activate FDR and cause 28 ( fast traffic HO) En_DR(Micro) = Enable EN_Forced_DR(Micro) = Enable En_Fast_Taffic_HO(Micro) = Enable L_Rxlev_Ncell_DR(Macro) = - 85 dBm Free_Level_DR(Macro) = 1
1 10 44
B11 Radio Fine Tuning Solutions GSM B11 BSS B11 Radio Fine Tuning Introduction All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010

City center

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent 2010 3JK12210AAAAWBZZA Issue 1 Section 1 Module 10 Page 44

Last But One Page


Switch to notes view!

1
@@PRODUCT @@COURSENAME

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME - Page 1

All rights reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR @@COURSENAME - Page 2

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen